WO2000040210A2 - Topical compositions comprising protected functional thiols - Google Patents

Topical compositions comprising protected functional thiols Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2000040210A2
WO2000040210A2 PCT/US2000/000444 US0000444W WO0040210A2 WO 2000040210 A2 WO2000040210 A2 WO 2000040210A2 US 0000444 W US0000444 W US 0000444W WO 0040210 A2 WO0040210 A2 WO 0040210A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
groups
wherem
hair
agents
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2000/000444
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2000040210A3 (en
Inventor
Robert Wayne Glenn, Jr.
Alan Roy Katritzky
Eric Block
Matthew David Shair
Matthew David Butts
Original Assignee
The Procter & Gamble Company
General Electric Company
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by The Procter & Gamble Company, General Electric Company filed Critical The Procter & Gamble Company
Priority to CA002356325A priority Critical patent/CA2356325C/en
Priority to BR0007437-3A priority patent/BR0007437A/en
Priority to AU26037/00A priority patent/AU2603700A/en
Priority to EP00904252A priority patent/EP1143916A2/en
Priority to JP2000591967A priority patent/JP2002541058A/en
Publication of WO2000040210A2 publication Critical patent/WO2000040210A2/en
Publication of WO2000040210A3 publication Critical patent/WO2000040210A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/72Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic macromolecular compounds
    • A61K8/84Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions otherwise than those involving only carbon-carbon unsaturated bonds
    • A61K8/89Polysiloxanes
    • A61K8/896Polysiloxanes containing atoms other than silicon, carbon, oxygen and hydrogen, e.g. dimethicone copolyol phosphate
    • A61K8/898Polysiloxanes containing atoms other than silicon, carbon, oxygen and hydrogen, e.g. dimethicone copolyol phosphate containing nitrogen, e.g. amodimethicone, trimethyl silyl amodimethicone or dimethicone propyl PG-betaine
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/30Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds
    • A61K8/46Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing sulfur
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/30Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds
    • A61K8/49Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/30Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds
    • A61K8/49Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K8/4906Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds with one nitrogen as the only hetero atom
    • A61K8/4926Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds with one nitrogen as the only hetero atom having six membered rings
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/30Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds
    • A61K8/49Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K8/494Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds with more than one nitrogen as the only hetero atom
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/30Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds
    • A61K8/49Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K8/494Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds with more than one nitrogen as the only hetero atom
    • A61K8/4946Imidazoles or their condensed derivatives, e.g. benzimidazoles
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/30Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds
    • A61K8/49Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K8/494Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds with more than one nitrogen as the only hetero atom
    • A61K8/4953Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds with more than one nitrogen as the only hetero atom containing pyrimidine ring derivatives, e.g. minoxidil
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/30Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds
    • A61K8/49Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K8/494Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds with more than one nitrogen as the only hetero atom
    • A61K8/496Triazoles or their condensed derivatives, e.g. benzotriazoles
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/30Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds
    • A61K8/69Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing fluorine
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/72Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic macromolecular compounds
    • A61K8/84Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions otherwise than those involving only carbon-carbon unsaturated bonds
    • A61K8/89Polysiloxanes
    • A61K8/896Polysiloxanes containing atoms other than silicon, carbon, oxygen and hydrogen, e.g. dimethicone copolyol phosphate
    • A61K8/899Polysiloxanes containing atoms other than silicon, carbon, oxygen and hydrogen, e.g. dimethicone copolyol phosphate containing sulfur, e.g. sodium PG-propyldimethicone thiosulfate copolyol
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61QSPECIFIC USE OF COSMETICS OR SIMILAR TOILETRY PREPARATIONS
    • A61Q5/00Preparations for care of the hair
    • A61Q5/10Preparations for permanently dyeing the hair
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61QSPECIFIC USE OF COSMETICS OR SIMILAR TOILETRY PREPARATIONS
    • A61Q5/00Preparations for care of the hair
    • A61Q5/12Preparations containing hair conditioners
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61QSPECIFIC USE OF COSMETICS OR SIMILAR TOILETRY PREPARATIONS
    • A61Q11/00Preparations for care of the teeth, of the oral cavity or of dentures; Dentifrices, e.g. toothpastes; Mouth rinses
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61QSPECIFIC USE OF COSMETICS OR SIMILAR TOILETRY PREPARATIONS
    • A61Q19/00Preparations for care of the skin
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61QSPECIFIC USE OF COSMETICS OR SIMILAR TOILETRY PREPARATIONS
    • A61Q3/00Manicure or pedicure preparations
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61QSPECIFIC USE OF COSMETICS OR SIMILAR TOILETRY PREPARATIONS
    • A61Q5/00Preparations for care of the hair

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to topical compositions for treating amino acid based substrates.
  • the topical compositions comprise cosmetic or therapeutic actives that have been bound to a protected thiol which acts as a molecular 'hook' to impart "permanent" benefits to the ammo acid based substrates.
  • the ammo acid based substrates can include, for example, protemaceous mate ⁇ als such as keratm, as found in human hair, animal fur, velus hair on skm, finger and toe nails; vanous animal body parts, such as horns, hooves and feathers; other naturally occurring protein containing mate ⁇ als, such as wool; and synthetic polymers.
  • compositions which deliver and attach cosmetic actives to human hair.
  • ammo-acid based fibers can be treated with agents that deliver one or more cosmetic benefits, such as conditioning, styling or setting.
  • the conventional cosmetic products which have been known and used commercially have relied upon two key factors: deposition and retention.
  • the cosmetic actives must first be physically deposited onto the hair fiber where the active imparts a benefit to a sufficient degree.
  • the bonding of the cosmetic active mate ⁇ al to the hair is generally of the nature of physico-chemical mtermolecular forces, e.g., physisorption.
  • Such physical forces comp ⁇ se, for example, hydrogen bonding, electrostatic interactions, van der Waals interactions and the like.
  • cationic cosmetic agents generally of the quaternary ammonium type, are known to bond to hair by virtue of the interaction of their cations with anionic ammo acid residues within keratin, e.g., glutamic acid, aspartic acid, cysteic acid etc.
  • a major problem, however, with physisorption is the inevitable short lived retention of the cosmetic agent on hair. This is due to the relatively weak physical forces which bind the cosmetic to hair and which are easily disrupted by other treatments, e g washing And, given the frequent need for treating hair, performance retention is difficult to achieve and generally does not last in excess of the period between washes.
  • One approach that has been disclosed in the art to overcome the above problem to provide truly durable or "permanent" cosmetic benefits to hair that are retained through multiple washes is to utilize molecular "hooks" to chemically bond cosmetic actives to hair keratin, e.g., chemisorption. Chemisorption results in a permanent juncture that is essentially resistant to physical wear from subsequent washings or physical abrasion.
  • Two conventional approaches to achieve chemisorption comp ⁇ se the use of either electrophihc reactive moieties or thiol reactive moieties attached to the cosmetic active. Electrophihc reactive moieties are designed to react with thiol functional groups present m hair and thiol reactive moieties are designed to react with electrophihc functional groups within the hair to create a covalent bond.
  • the approach has disadvantages that arise from the required pre- reduction step
  • the reduction step is known to be a very harsh chemical process that imparts considerable damage to hair
  • the effective reducing agents are typically mercaptans of low molecular weight and are odiferous.
  • the pre-reduction process generates unpleasant malodor that remains on the hair for greater than a week time m most instances
  • the required pre-reduction imparts an additional step to the process with attendant added inconvenience to the user
  • Ker represents keratm and R-SH represents a suitable nucleophihc active where R is a cosmetic agent and -SH representing a nucleophihc moiety.
  • thiols are the preferred nucleophihc reactive moieties that possess enough reactive strength to chemically bond with the disulfide bond of cystine, Ker-S-S-Ker, under safe and mild consumer conditions (e.g , relatively non toxic, less than 120°F, pH 2 to 11).
  • Most other prospective nucleophihc molecular handles are either highly toxic (e g , selenols), or are unreactive under mild conditions (e.g , alkoxides with pKa ⁇ 15).
  • nucleophihc thiols As reactive moieties to form covalent bonds with keratm.
  • thiol nucleophihc moieties are known to be unstable in the presence of air. Atmosphere induced oxidation of the thiols to the corresponding, and unreactive, disulfide as is shown in the following equation (d) where R-SH represents a suitable nucleophihc cosmetic active R being an alkyl cosmetic agent and -SH representing the nucleophihc moiety:
  • nucleophihc thiols are generally not stable enough to be utilized as such m a large majo ⁇ ty of current product forms, 1 e .
  • the nucleophihc thiol moiety has very little affinity for hair keratin and has very low aqueous solubility, both of which hinder its performance in generating durable cosmetic benefits, especially when attached to hydrophobic, insoluble cosmetic actives, 1 e , hydrocarbon conditioners, m-soluble polymers etc
  • the present invention is concerned with topical compositions compnsing classes of compounds containing at least one thiol in a protected form, which can be released to provide a - SH or -S " group p ⁇ or or simultaneous to use These protected thiols are referred to herein as "hooks" It is understood that withm the scope of this invention that functional thiols as represented herein include both the protonated thiol, R-SH, and unprotonated thiolate, R-S "
  • the 'hooks' of the present invention enable the achievement of durable cosmetic benefits that are resistant to cleansing or shampooing from essentially a non-damagmg process that is void of cold waving.
  • the binding of the cosmetic actives provided by these molecular 'hooks' is to such a degree of durability that the measured cosmetic benefits will remain in hair for multiple shampoo cycles, e.g. eight to twenty or more. While not being restricted by theory, it is believed that such a high degree of durability is due to the formation of covalent bonds between the cosmetic active and the keratmaceous substrate. This bond formation may occur in either of two ways. First, the protected thiol compound can be mixed with a activating release agent to form the free functional thiol, reaction (e) The free thiol will then react with the substrate thereby attaching the functional group, reaction (f).
  • R represents the cosmetic active
  • Ker represents the keratin protein
  • S represents sulfur
  • -SH represents the thiol
  • Pr represents the protecting group.
  • the above thiol- protecting group bond is broken via some form of activation yielding the reactive unprotected thiol which would then be capable of forming a mixed disulfide with keratm disulfides via nucleophihc displacement.
  • activation could be accomplished via hydrolysis or by the action of a nucleophile other than water, either m the substrate itself or in a separate composition
  • Such hydrolysis or nucleophihc attack can itself be enhanced m several way such as by application of a source of energy or catalysis.
  • This mixing may be done p ⁇ or to use or simultaneously, du ⁇ ng application to the substrate. Where the mixing occurs simultaneously to application, the release of the protecting group occurs in-situ on the substrate.
  • the cosmetic agent, R, of the present invention may be monofunctionahzed, i.e. the cosmetic active moiety, R, car ⁇ es a single molecular "hook" connected to the cosmetic agent via a sulfur-sp 3 carbon bond, or it may be bis- or multi- functionahzed, i.e. the cosmetic active, R, may carry two or more sp 3 electrophiles connected to the cosmetic agent via separate sulfur-sp 3 carbon bonds.
  • the latter may be useful for example m achieving a greater degree of chemical bonding of the cosmetic agent to the substrate or for generating bonds between adjacent features of the substrate, e.g. producing a cross-lmkmg effect.
  • Preferred embodiments of the present invention are related to functional silicone compositions More specifically, these embodiments are related to functional silicone compositions which are used in the cosmetics industry.
  • Silicones are widely used in hair care products due to the conditioning benefit that they impart to hair.
  • the silicone is deposited on hair during the application process but is held only by weak physical forces, such as hydrogen bonding or van der Waals interactions. Because the forces are weak, the benefits of silicone by deposition are short lived.
  • Beneficial conditioning effect can also be caused by treating hair with silanol capped ammo-functionahzed silicones. These can undergo condensation cure reactions on hair to form somewhat durable films.
  • conditioning benefits are attributed to the deposition of high molecular weight, high viscosity fluids and gums which can weight down the hair.
  • Gough et al. in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,523,080 and 5,525,332 descnbe the synthesis of sihcone- azlactone polymers which exhibit covalent bonding and "permanent" conditioning benefit.
  • Gough et al. discuss incorporating an azlactone-functionalized copolymer which consists of vmylazlactone and methacryloyl polydimethylsiloxane monomers into a sihcone-active group- hair structure.
  • the hair treatment using the sihcone-azlactone polymers did not consist of the steps of reduction with a glycolate or reoxidation with peroxide.
  • New compositions are constantly being sought which impart improved hair care benefits without a harsh, damaging chemical treatment.
  • This invention relates to a topical composition for treating ammo acid based substrates compnsing a protected thiol compound having the formula
  • R- ⁇ S— Pr) m where R is a mono or multivalent cosmetically active functional group, S is sulfur, and Pr is a protecting group, and m is an integer between 1 and 100.
  • the invention further relates to systems which comp ⁇ se this protected thiol compound and an activating mechanism.
  • the protected thiol compounds of the present invention may be used in hair care compositions, textile care compositions, cosmetic compositions, oral care compositions, skin care, nail care, laundry care, acne care and animal care compositions
  • a preferred embodiment of the present invention provides a silicone composition and method for making.
  • the composition compnses a polysiloxane or silicone resm, at least one linker, and at least one molecular hook.
  • the present invention relates to topical compositions which provide attachment of functional groups to ammo acid based substrates.
  • cysteme containing, ammo acid based substrates are proteinaceous mate ⁇ als which contain the amino acid cystine in its amino acid sequence.
  • amino acid sequence refers to a specific configuration of the ammo acids comprising a protein. Cystine amino acid units are represented by Ker-S-S-Ker and cysteine amino acid units by Ker- SH.
  • the compositions of the present invention can be used to attach functional groups to materials such as keratm, as found m human and animal hair, skm and nails; various animal body parts such as horns, hooves and feathers; and other naturally occurnng protein containing materials, such as wool.
  • compositions of the present invention can comp ⁇ se, consist of, or consist essentially of the essential elements and limitations of the invention descnbed herein, as well as any of the additional or optional ingredients, components, or limitations described herein.
  • compositions of the present invention comp ⁇ se a protected thiol compound having the formula
  • R_ ⁇ S— Pr) m where R is a mono or multivalent cosmetically active functional group, S is sulfur, Pr is a protecting group, and m is an integer ranging from about 1 to about 100, preferably from about 1 to about 50, more preferably equal to 1 to about 20, and most preferably equal to 1 to about 5.
  • the protected thiol compounds of the present invention are present m the compositions of the invention in an amount from about 0.000001% to about 30%, preferably from about 0 0001% to about 25%, more preferably from 0 01 to about 20%, even more preferably from about 0 1% to about 10%, and most preferably from about 1% to about 5%, by weight of the composition
  • Suitable ranges of amounts will generally depend upon the functional group in question
  • hair conditioners that are modified with the molecular hooks' of the present invention will normally be present from about 0 01% to 10% by weight of the composition
  • hair styling agents that are modified such as cationic conditioning polymers or polyisobutylene will normally be present from about 0 01 to 10% by weight of the composition
  • perfluoropolyether mate ⁇ als that are modified may be present from about 0 000001 to 0 1% by weight of the composition
  • hair dye chromophonc matenals may be present from 0 1% to 10% and other film forming polymers that are modified may be present from
  • the protected thiol compound compnses from about 1 to about 100, preferably from about 1 to about 50, more preferably from about 1 to 20, and most preferably equal from 1 to about 5 sulfur atoms, each linked to one protective group Protecting Group
  • the protected thiol compounds of the present invention compnse 1 to about 100, preferably 1 to 50, more preferably 1 to 20 and most preferably 1 to 5 protecting groups
  • the protecting group may be selected from the range consisting of heterocyclic protecting groups, sp 2 aliphatic trigonal carbon protecting groups, sp 3 carbon protecting groups, metal based protecting groups, non-metal and metalloid based protecting groups, energy-sensitive protecting groups and mixtures thereof
  • the protecting group is preferably selected from the range consisting of heterocyclic protecting groups, sp 2 aliphatic tngonal carbon protecting groups, sp 3 carbon protecting groups and non-metal protecting groups
  • the protecting group is more preferably selected from heterocyclic protecting groups, sp 2 aliphatic tngonal carbon protecting groups and non-metal protecting groups
  • the cosmetic composition of the present invention comprises a protected thiol compound wherein the thiol protective group may be a heterocyclic nng or ring system
  • Heterocyclic groups that are suitable for use m the present invention include mono- or polyunsaturated or saturated heterocyclic nngs, heterocyclic nng systems, fused heterocyclic ring systems, substituted heterocyclic nngs, substituted heterocyclic nng systems or substituted fused heterocyclic nng systems
  • the heterocyclic nngs contain from about three to about thirty members, and may contain electronegative heteroatoms including N, O, S, or P
  • Optional substituents on the heterocyclic nng or ring system can be selected from electron withdrawing, electron neutral, or electron donating groups with Hammett sigma para values between -1.0 and +1.5 which can be non-ionic, zwitteriomc, cationic or anionic comprising for example C-lmked groups of the classes defined above as A 1 , A 2 , A 3 , and A 4 ; S- hnked groups including SA 1 , SCN, SO 2 A ⁇ SO 3 A 1 , SSA 1 , SOA 1 , SOzNA'A 2 , SNA 1 A 2 , S(NA')A 2 , S(0)(NA')A 2 , SA' NA 2 ), SONA'A 2 ; 0-hnked groups including OA 1 , OOA 1 , OCN, ONA'A 2 ; N- linked groups including NA'A 2 , NA ⁇ 2 A 3 ⁇
  • Ak is A 1 , A 2 , A 3 , and A 4 or X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 X 5 ...
  • Hal is F, Cl, Br, or I.
  • H is hydrogen, O is oxygen, N is nitrogen, C is carbon, S is sulfur, Cl is chlonne, Br is bromine, I is iodine, F is fluonne, R is any cosmetically active, functional group or benefit agent as descnbed herein below.
  • the invention includes the following preferred non-hmitmg heterocyclic exemplary classes and their X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 , X 5 ... substituted denvatives [Herein referred to as Class I]: - Six membered heterocycles with a single heteroatom such as py ⁇ dme:
  • heterocychcs with three heteroatoms such as 1,2,4-t ⁇ azoles, 1,2,3-t ⁇ azoles, 1,2,4-oxad ⁇ azoles, and 1,2,4-th ⁇ ad ⁇ azoles
  • the invention may also include heterocyclic compounds compnsing the cosmetic active, R, that are capable of generating a thiol via a ⁇ ng-openmg mechanism.
  • Such compounds are represented by the following structures:
  • At least one cosmetic group, R comprises or is attached to any of the X 1 , X 2 , X 3 groups.
  • Q 1 and Q 2 represent, independently from one another, a divalent group comparable to A 1 but with the open valencies separated by 0 to 4 atoms.
  • W 1 represents an electron withdrawing group with a Hammett sigma para value more positive than 0.10 comprising C-linked groups of the classes defined above as A 1 , A 2 , A 3 ; S- linked groups including SA 1 , SCN, S0 2 A ⁇ SO 3 A 1 , SSA 1 , SOA 1 , SONA'A 2 , S0 2 NA ⁇ 2 , SNA 1 A 2 , S(NA')A 2 , S(0)(NA 1 )A 2 , SA'(NA 2 ); O-linked groups including OA 1 , OOA 1 , OCN, ONA'A 2 ; N- hnked groups including NA !
  • L 1 is a suitable leaving group including but not limited to SA 1 , OA 1 , or NA'A 2
  • SA 1 a suitable leaving group including but not limited to SA 1 , OA 1 , or NA'A 2
  • a thiolactone, thiophthahde, and thiazohdinone (classes II, HI and IV),
  • a dihydrothiophene, dihydrothiopyran, and d ⁇ hydro-l,4-th ⁇ az ⁇ ne (classes V, VI and VII),
  • a dihydrothiepm, thiopyran and thiepmone (classes XI, XII and XIU),
  • Preferred protected thiol compounds of the heterocyclic thiol protective type include the following non-hmitmg examples:
  • Hal " is Cl " , Br " , I " or any suitable negatively charged counte ⁇ on.
  • the protecting groups of the present invention may comprise a sp 2 carbon moiety wherein the divalent sulfur atom is bonded on one side to the cosmetic active and on the other side to a sp" carbon atom.
  • Protecting groups of the sp 2 aliphatic trigonal carbon type that are suitable for the present invention include (a) aliphatic trigonal carbon atoms double bonded to O, S, N, or C,
  • R- -X 1 which includes de ⁇ vatives of the following acids: thiocarboxyhc (R-S-C(0)CH 2 -A"), carbonodithioic (R-S-C(O)S-A 1 , R-S-C(S)O-A'), carbonothioic (R-S-C(O)O-A 1 ), carbamothioic (R-S-C(0)N-A 1 A 2 ), dithiocarboxyhc (R-S-C(S)CH 2 -A'), carbonotnthioic (R-S-C(S)S-A 1 ), carbamoditmoic (R-S-C(S)N-A ⁇ 2 ), carboximidotmoic carbommidodithioic (R-S-C(NA')S-A 1 ), and carbommidothioic (R-S-C(NA')O-A 1 ) acids Suitable sp 2 aliphatic
  • the invention also includes (b) related sp 2 carbon derivatives that are capable of releasing a cosmetic thiol via an intramolecular nucleophihc attack and release mechanism, M 1
  • Nu— Q 1 (c) sp 2 carbon derivatives that are capable of rearranging to produce a cosmetic containing thiol via an intramolecular nucleophihc attack and rearrangement mechanism
  • R- -C- -X 1 and related aliphatic tngonal carbon va ⁇ ations will also incorporate a Cl “ , Br “ , I " or other suitable negatively charged counte ⁇ on.
  • M 1 , M 2 are O, S, NA 1 , NOA 1 , NA ] A 2+ , CA ⁇ CAV, SA + , OA + .
  • E 1 is O, S, NA 1 , CAW.
  • Nu is NHA'A 2 *, NA'A 2 , OHA 1+ , OA 1 .
  • a 1 , A 2 represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cychc aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can incorporate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or per fluoro substitution.
  • Q is a divalent group comparable to A 1 but with the open valencies separated by 2 to 7 atoms.
  • Y 1 represents electron an withdrawing substituent with a Hammett sigma para value more positive than 0.10.
  • H is hydrogen, O is oxygen, N is nitrogen, C is carbon, S is sulfur, Cl is chlorine, Br is bromine, I is iodine, F is fluorine, R is any cosmetically active functional group or benefit agent as descnbed herein below.
  • Non-hmitmg examples of suitable X 1 groups are as follows:
  • Preferred protected thiol compounds of the sp 2 carbon thiol protective type include the following non-limiting examples:
  • the protecting groups of the present invention may comprise an sp 3 carbon moiety wherein the divalent sulfur atom is bonded on one side to the cosmetic active and on the other side to a sp 3 carbon atom.
  • Protecting groups of the sp 3 carbon type that are suitable for the present invention include those of the thioether type,
  • VI VI
  • VI the tnthioorthoester type
  • SA A3 (vm) the thiohemiammal (LX), monothioorthoamide (X) and dithioorthoamide (XI) type, X 1 OA 3 SA 3
  • At least one of X 1 , X 2 , or X 3 groups is electron donating such that the sum of the Hammett sigma para values for X 1 , X 2 , X 3 is negative for this class.
  • a 1 , A 2 , A 3 , A 4 represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cyclic aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can incorporate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or per fluoro substitution.
  • H is hydrogen, O is oxygen, N is nitrogen, C is carbon, S is sulfur, Cl is chlorine, Br is bromine, I is iodine, F is fluonne, R is any cosmetic active, functional group or benefit agent as descnbed herein below.
  • Preferred electron donating substituents for X 1 , X 2 , X 3 are aromatic or heteroaromatic denvatives which include the following non-hmitmg examples:
  • Preferred protected thiol compounds chosen from classes I through XI above include the following non-limiting examples:
  • the present invention also includes organosulfur molecular "hooks" wherein the potential cosmetic thiol is bonded directly to an sp 3 carbon atom that is part of a group capable of undergoing heterolytic ⁇ -elimination, the reversal of Michael Addition reactions, to liberate a thiol.
  • organosulfur molecular "hooks” wherein the potential cosmetic thiol is bonded directly to an sp 3 carbon atom that is part of a group capable of undergoing heterolytic ⁇ -elimination, the reversal of Michael Addition reactions, to liberate a thiol.
  • Suitable sp 3 carbon groups capable of undergoing heterolytic ⁇ -elimination are represented in the compounds,
  • Y 1 and Y 2 represent, independently from one another, electron withdrawing substituents with a combined Hammett sigma para value more positive than 0 10.
  • Some non-hmitmg examples of aromatic and heteroaromatic electron withdrawing groups for Y 1 and Y 2 include the following:
  • Prefe ⁇ ed hook compounds that are capable of undergoing heterolytic ⁇ -ehmination, the reversal of Michael Addition reactions, to liberate a thiol include the following non-hmiting examples
  • the present invention also includes cases wherein the cosmetic thiol is protected by being bonded directly to an sp 3 carbon atom that is inco ⁇ orated withm a ring structure.
  • Suitable sp carbon ring systems are represented by the following, wherein Z is O, NAk, S, (CH 2 ) 0 . 2 or
  • L 1 is A 1 or part of a 5 to 7 membered fused nng system.
  • the above ring system(s) can carry any substituents.
  • Specific examples of sp 3 carbon ring compounds covered by the present invention include the following non-hmiting examples:
  • a 1 , A 2 , A 3 represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cychc aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can mco ⁇ orate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or per fluoro substitution.
  • a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cychc aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P,
  • H is hydrogen, O is oxygen, N is nitrogen, C is carbon, S is sulfur, Cl is chlorine, Br is bromine, I is iodine, F is fluonne, R is any cosmetically active functional group or benefit agent as descnbed herein below.
  • the molecular "hooks" of the present invention compnse a divalent sulfur atom that is bonded on one side to the cosmetic active and on the other side to an alkaline earth metal, transition metal or a representative metal in groups ILA, LTJA, IV A, VA, VIA, VILA, Vm, LB, LLB, ⁇ LB, ⁇ VB, VB, VLB, and VLLB of the pe ⁇ odic table of the elements including Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, La, Ti, Zr, V, Cr, Mo, W, Mn, Fe, Co, Rh, Ni, Pd, Pt, Cu, Ag, Au, Zn, In, Sn, and Bi.
  • Protected thiol compounds compnsing such heavy metal mercaptides are represented by the following:
  • Met is an alkaline earth metal, transition metal or a representative metal in groups I A, ILIA, LVA, VA, VIA, VILA, Vffl. LB, ILB, LLLB, LVB, VB, VLB, and VILB of the periodic table of the elements including Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, La, Ti, Zr, V, Cr, Mo, W, Mn, Fe, Co, Rh, Ni, Pd, Pt, Cu, Ag, Au, Zn, In, Sn, and Bi. Also, wherein n and m are zero or integers such that 1 + 2m + n equals the valency of Met.
  • X represents independent electron withdrawing, electron neutral or electron donating groups with Hammett sigma para values between -1 0 and +1.5 which can be non-iomc, zwittenomc.
  • a 1 , A 2 , A 3 , A 4 represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cyclic aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can mco ⁇ orate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or per fluoro substitution.
  • M is a divalent group such as O, S, NA 1 or CA'A 2 .
  • H is hydrogen, O is oxygen, N is nitrogen, C is carbon, S is sulfur, Cl is chlorine, Br is bromine, I is iodine, F is fluonne, B is boron, Al is aluminum, Si is silicon, N is nitrogen, Mg is magnesium, Ca is calcium, Sr is strontium, Ba is banum, La is lanthanum, Ti is titanium, Zr is zirconium, V is vanadium, Cr is chromium, Mo is molybdenum, W is tungsten, Mn is manganese, Fe is iron, Co is cobalt, Rh is rhodium, Ni is nickel, Pd is palladium, Pt is platinum, Cu is copper, Ag is silver, Au is gold, Zn is zinc, In is mdium, Sn is tin, Bi is bismuth, and R is any cosmetic active, functional group or benefit agent as descnbed herein below.
  • At least one substituent, X, or the cosmetic active, R contains salt forming or water solubilizmg groups including, but not limited to, COO " , S0 3 , NH 3 + , OH, COOA 1 , (CH 2 CH 2 O) n A ⁇ CONA'A 2 , OS0 3 " , OP0 3 H ⁇ NA ! A 2 A 3 ⁇ , and the like.
  • Preferred metal based projectmg groups of the present invention include, but are not limited to, the following examples,
  • R-S Ti-OCH2CH 2 CH 2 CH3 OCH2CH2CH2CH3
  • the molecular "hooks" of the present invention compnse a divalent sulfur atom that is bonded on one side to the cosmetic active and on the other side to a representative non-metal or metalloid atom including boron, aluminum, silicon, germanium, nitrogen, phosphorus, sulfur, selenium, antimony, and tellurium.
  • Molecular "hooks" whereby a divalent sulfur atom of a potential cosmetic thiol is bonded directly to these representative non-metals and metalloids are represented by the following
  • E is a representative non-metal or metalloid element including B, Al, Si, Ge, N, P, S, Se, Sb, and Te. Also, wherein n and m are zero or integers such that 1 + 2m + n equals the valency of E.
  • M is a divalent group such as O, S, NA 1 or CA'A 2 .
  • a 1 , A 2 , A 3 , A 4 represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cyclic aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can mco ⁇ orate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or per fluoro substitution.
  • H is hydrogen, O is oxygen, N is nitrogen, C is carbon, S is sulfur, Cl is chlonne, Br is bromine, I is iodine, F is fluonne, B is boron, Al is aluminum, Si is silicon, Ge is germanium, N is nitrogen, P is phosphorus, Te is tellu ⁇ um, and R is any cosmetic active, functional group or benefit agent as described herein below.
  • Preferred thiol protective systems utilizing non-metals and metalloids of the present invention include, but are not limited to, the following examples,
  • the topical compositions of the present invention may also compnse a protected thiol compound wherein the protecting group is energy-sensitive.
  • Protected thiol compounds comprising energy-sensitive protecting groups are chemically stable in solution. Such potential thiols are protected until a suitable source of energy is applied to the composition. Upon application of a suitable energy source, the energy-sensitive protecting groups become labile, thereby releasing the reactive thiol Typically, the energy source will be light. Once the thiols are released, they are capable of reacting with amino acid residues present in keratmaceous substrates to enable durable cosmetic benefits.
  • the protected thiols are activated by applying a suitable energy source to the composition, i.e., irradiation, which converts the photoactivatable protected thiol compounds to fully reactive thiol compounds.
  • a suitable energy source i.e., irradiation
  • the byproducts of the energy activation of the protecting group will usually be removed from the substrate by washing.
  • thiol groups can be employed for protecting thiols used in the topical compositions of the present invention.
  • the thiol groups are protected with a photoactivatable protecting group that is capable of liberating or releasing the reactive thiol by irradiation
  • the photosensitive groups will preferably be activatable by low energy ultraviolet or visible light.
  • Many, although not all, of the energy-sensitive protecting groups are aromatic compounds. Suitable photoremovable protecting groups are also descnbed in, for example, Patchomik, 1970, J Am. Chem.
  • the energy-sensitive protecting group will be a nitrobenzyhc compound, such as o-nitrobenzyl or benzylsulfonyl groups.
  • Suitable examples include 6-nitroveratryloxycarbonyl (NVOC); 6-mtrop ⁇ peronyloxycarbonyl (NPOC); alpha, alpha-dimethyldimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl (DDZ), methyl 6-n ⁇ troveratryloxycarbonyl (MenVOC), methyl-6-mtrop ⁇ peronyloxycarbonyl (MeNPOC), or 1-pyrenylmethyl.
  • the energy-sensitive protecting group may also be of the silyl type as descnbed m Pirrung and Lee, 1993, J Org Chem. 58:6961-6963 and Pirrung and U.S. Patent Number 5,486,633, issued to Lee, both inco ⁇ orated by reference herein. Suitable examples include (hydroxystyryl)d ⁇ methyls ⁇ lyl (HSDMS) and (hydroxystyryl)dusopropyls ⁇ lyl (HSDIS).
  • energy-sensitive protecting groups are suitable for use in the present method.
  • Some examples of acceptable energy-sensitive protecting groups are presented in Table 1, below, together with their corresponding wavelengths for deprotection.
  • NVOC 6-n ⁇ troveratryloxycarbonyl
  • DDZ dimethyldimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl
  • NBOC mtrobenzyloxycarbonyl
  • BNI 5-bromo-7-n ⁇ tromdohnyl
  • HMC O-hydroxy-alpha-methyl-cinnamoyl
  • OMA 2-oxymethylene anthraquinone
  • the composition containing the cosmetic active protected with the energy-sensitive group may be activated with energy both p ⁇ or or during usage.
  • the energy source may be applied to the composition for a sufficient time penod to activate the energy sensitive protecting group either before, du ⁇ ng or after the composition is applied to the substrate.
  • the energy source may include vanous types of electromagnetic radiation including ultraviolet, visible, near infrared, infrared, far infrared or microwave. In a preferred embodiment, the radiation is UV, near LR or visible light.
  • Suitable protecting groups that are capable of undergoing photochemical or thermal thiol deprotection include, but are not limited to, the following:
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 , and X 5 can be selected from electron withdrawing, electron neutral, or electron donatmg groups with Hammett sigma para values between -1.0 and +1.5 which can be non-ionic, zwitte ⁇ omc, cationic or anionic compnsing for example C-lmked groups of the classes defined below as A 1 , A 2 , A 3 ; S-lmked groups including SA 1 , SCN, S0 2 A', SO 3 A ⁇ SSA 1 , SOA 1 , SONAV, SO J NA'A 2 , SNA 1 A 2 , S(NA')A 2 , S(0)(NA')A 2 , SA'(NA 2 ); O-lmked groups including OA 1 , OOA 1 , OCN, ONA'A 2 ; N-hnked groups including NA'A 2 , NA ⁇ 2 A 3+ , NC, NA'OA 2 , NA'SA 2 , N
  • a 1 , A 2 represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cyclic aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can inco ⁇ orate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or per fluoro substitution Mono or Multivalent Cosmetically Active Functional Group
  • the mono or multivalent cosmetically active functional, R, suitable for inclusion in the present invention may be any compound that imparts one or more visual, tactile or other cosmetic beneficial effects on proteinaceous matenals such as keratin, i.e., hair, animal fur or wool.
  • Any cosmetic compound may be included as a functional group in the compositions of the present invention as long as the compound can be modified to contain at least one divalent sulfur atom linked to a suitable protecting group as descnbed herein.
  • Suitable functional groups that can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to antimicrobial compounds, UV-absorbmg compounds, skin conditioning agents, hair conditioning agents, hair repair agents, hair styling agents, hair dyes, scalp treatment agents, anti- inflammatory compounds, antioxidants, dyes and colonng agents, perfumes, oral care actives, skm moistunzers, pharmaceutical agents, antidandruff agents, insect repellents, moistunzers, humectants, pearlescent and/or opacifying mate ⁇ als, fab ⁇ c care actives, pet grooming actives, fabric anti-w ⁇ nklmg agents, sh ⁇ nk-resistant actives, laundry care actives, hard surfaces actives, textile actives, textile dyes, water-proofing agents, cationic polymers, cationic surface modifiers, hydrophobic surface modifiers, anionic surface modifiers, absorbents, antifungal agents, msecticidal agents, textile color guards, nail actives such as enamel and polish, eye
  • Suitable antimicrobials which can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to denvatives of phenol, cresol, hydroxybenzoates, Tnclosan®, T ⁇ carban®, chlorhexidme, metal salts (e.g.
  • zmc citrate sodium zmc citrate, zinc pyndmethione, and stannous pyrophosphate
  • sanguma ⁇ ne extract metromdazole
  • quaternary ammonium compounds chlorhexidme digluconate, hexetidione, octenidme, alexidme
  • halogenated bisphenohc compounds such as 2,2'-methyleneb ⁇ s-(4-chloro-6-bromophenol), and salicylanihde.
  • UV-absorbmg matenals which can be protected as thiol derivatives include but are not limited to denvatives of benzoates, oxybenzones, cmnamic acid, PARSOL MCX esters, benzotnazoles, and benzophenones.
  • suitable skm conditioners or moisturizers which can be protected as thiol denvatives. include but are not limited to derivatives of alpha-hydroxy acids, polyols, hyaluronic acid, petrolatum, vegetable oils, esters of fatty acids, and mineral oil Such skin conditioners or moisturizers are bound to the velus hairs present on the skin, and not the skm directly, to achieve the long lasting skin benefits.
  • Suitable anti-inflammatory agents which can be protected as thiol derivatives include but are not limited to corticosteroids or sahcylates.
  • Suitable hair conditioners which can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to mtact or modified proteins, such as hydrolyzed keratm, collagen, elastin, hemoglobin, silk, rice, soy, wheat protein, corn, fibronectin, reticulum, serum protein, wheat gluten, peptides and peptide denvatives; amino acids; hydroxylated fats; glycinates; silicone polymers, such as siloxane gums and resins, volatile or non-volatile silicone oils, ammo- (or other) functional silicones, and other sihcone-contammg polymers; hydrocarbon based conditioners including C 8 -C 30 alkyl, alkenyl, modified alkyl or modified alkenyl, branched alkyl and branched alkenyl groups as well as long chain alkyl groups that are ethoxylated or substituted with vanous non-ionic, cationic or anionic functional groups including quats, am
  • Suitable hair styling agents which can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to film-forming polymers such as polyvinylpyrrohdone/vmyl acetate copolymer; styling copolymers compnsing silicone macromonomers, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,618,524 and 5,658,557, cationic polymers, such as those disclosed in GB-A-2161172 (Beecham), GB-A- 2122214 (Unilever) and GB-A-2050166 (L'Oreal); and hydrocarbon polymers, such as polyisobutylene; perfluoro-aliphatic and perfiuoro-aromatic compounds.
  • film-forming polymers such as polyvinylpyrrohdone/vmyl acetate copolymer
  • styling copolymers compnsing silicone macromonomers U.S. Patent Nos. 5,618,524 and 5,658,557
  • cationic polymers such as those disclosed in GB-
  • Suitable dyes and colonng agents which can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to phenol, naphthols, acid dyes, azo denvatives; vegetable dyes, metallized dyes, nitrobenzene dyes, qumone-imme dyes, basic dyes, quaternary dyes, and oxidation dyes.
  • suitable cationic polymers that can be protected as thiol derivatives include but are not limited to denvatives of quaternary ammonium salts of hydroxyethylcellulose, cationic copolymers of acrylic acid and acrylamide, cationic guar polymers, copolymers of vinylimidazohum methochlo ⁇ de and vinylpyrrohdone, polyethylemmines, and other cationic polymers and resms known to those skilled m the art.
  • suitable oral care active agents that can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to anti-canes agents such as amine fluorides, monosodium fluorophosphate, casem; plaque buffers such as urea, calcium lactate, calcium glycerophosphate; anti-plaque agents, agents for alleviating sensitive teeth, e.g. potassium and strontium salts, particularly those of carboxylic acids; matenals that form films and block pores, oral pharmaceutical actives, (e.g.
  • ibuprofen e.g. ibuprofen, flurbiprofen, aspi ⁇ n and indomethacin
  • biomolecules such as peptides, antibodies and enzymes
  • anti-tartar agents agents for treating bad breath such as zmc salts
  • anti-calculus agents e.g. alkali metal pyrophosphates, hypophosphite- contaming polymers, organic phosphonates, and phosphocitrates.
  • Suitable pharmaceutical agents that can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to medicinal agents, metabolic agents and other therapeutic agents of benefit in treating the human body.
  • the cyclodextnns can plausibly be utilized to deliver cosmetic actives molecules to the substrate such as perfumes that can be liberated slowly.
  • beneficial cosmetic actives include sealants, binders, resms, adhesives, waxes, drying oils, varnishes, and latex finishes which comp ⁇ se urethanes, polysulfides, acrylics, butyl polymers, maleated oils, cellulosics, starches etc.
  • the mono or multivalent cosmetically active functional preferably used in the present compositions is dependent on the product form desired.
  • Hair care compositions preferably use hair conditioners, hair styling agents, dyes and colonng agents, sunscreens, fragrances, antidandruff agents, or mixtures thereof as the functional group.
  • Preferable functional groups in textile care compositions include dyes and colonng agents, odor control actives, sealants, fragrances, and mixtures thereof.
  • Cosmetic compositions preferably compnse dyes and colonng agents, sealants, resms, varnishes, latex finishes, and mixtures thereof.
  • Oral care compositions preferably comp ⁇ se anti-canes agents, plaque buffers, anti-plaque agents, agents for alleviating sensitive teeth, mate ⁇ als that form films and block pores, oral pharmaceutical actives, biomolecules, anti-tartar agents, agents for treating bad breath, anti-calculus agents, and mixtures thereof as functional groups.
  • Pharmaceutical composition preferably select mono or multivalent cosmetically active functional groups from the group consisting of medicinal agents, metabolic agents, therapeutic agents, anti-inflammatory compounds, and mixtures thereof
  • Animal care composition preferably compnse antimicrobial agents, insect repellents, grooming actives, and mixtures thereof as functional groups.
  • the molecular 'hooks' of the present invention may be activated via a number of mechanisms either before, dunng or after the application of the topical compositions containing the protected thiol to the substrate.
  • Vanous embodiments of the present invention are systems which comp ⁇ se both the topical composition herein with an activating mechanism.
  • Such activation could be achieved via hydrolysis by the use of a mechanism to manipulate the pH of the environment surrounding the compound.
  • pH adjusting mechanisms may include acidic or alkaline solutions. Whether acidic or alkaline mechanisms are required is dependent on the protecting group used.
  • Hydrolysis may also be achieved via simply mixing the compound, delivered m its pu ⁇ fied form or from a non-aqueous solution, with water.
  • the molecular 'hook' could be activated by coming m contact with a suitable nucleophile
  • nucleophiles include, but are not limited to, nitrogen-containing functional groups, for example amines, oxygen-containing functional groups, for example hydroxyl groups, phosphorus-containing functional groups, for example phosphmes, and sulfur-contammg functional groups, for example thiol groups and sulfites.
  • the solution containing the 'hook' compound could be inter-mixed with a separate solution containing a nucleophile including reducmg agents such as ammonium thioglycolate or sodium bisulfite, either before, du ⁇ ng or after application of the compound to the substrate.
  • the 'hook' compound could be activated by nucleophihc groups present in the substrate itself as in the case of hair that has been reduced or cold waved, i.e. hair that has been treated with a reducing agent either pnor to or simultaneous to the application of the 'hook' compound.
  • the resultmg activated thiol 'hook' could then react directly as a nucleophile with keratmaceous disulf ⁇ des or oxidatively with the nucleophihc groups present in the substrate, e.g. with free thiol groups that were formed du ⁇ ng cold waving or reduction.
  • the latter process could be accelerated or enhanced via the addition of oxidation reagents, i.e.
  • the activation could also be accented via heat or a suitable energy source.
  • the energy source could be applied to the composition for a sufficient time period to activate the protecting group either before, during or after the composition is applied to the substrate.
  • the energy source may include various types of electromagnetic radiation including ultraviolet, visible, near infrared, infrared, far infrared or microwave radiation.
  • Another embodiment of the present invention compnses a kit compnsing the system compns g the topical compositions of the present invention and either a pH manipulating mechanism or a nucleophile mechanism, and a package compnsmg a first and second chamber; wherein the topical composition is packaged in and delivered out of one chamber and the activation mechanism is packaged in and delivered out of the second chamber.
  • the topical composition according to the invention can also typically include an acceptable vehicle to act as a dilutant, dispersant, or earner for the protected thiol compounds in the composition, so as to facilitate the distribution of the protected thiol compounds when the composition is applied to the keratmaceous substrate, i.e., hair, nails, wool, sk etc.
  • an acceptable vehicle to act as a dilutant, dispersant, or earner for the protected thiol compounds in the composition, so as to facilitate the distribution of the protected thiol compounds when the composition is applied to the keratmaceous substrate, i.e., hair, nails, wool, sk etc.
  • Vehicles other than water can include liquid or solid emollients, solvents, humectants, thickeners and powders. Examples of each of these types of vehicle, which can be used singly or as a mixture of one or more vehicles, are as follows:
  • Emollients such as stearyl alcohol, glyceryl mononcmoleate, glyceryl monostearate, mink oil, cetyl alcohol, isopropyl isostearate, steanc acid, isobutyl palmitate, lsocetyl stearate, oleyl alcohol, isopropyl laurate, hexyl laurate, decyl oleate, octadecan-2-ol, isododecane, lsocetyl alcohol, eicosanyl alcohol, behenyl alcohol, cetyl palmitate, silicone oils such as polydimethylsiloxane, cyclomethicone, di-n-butyl sebacate, isopropyl my ⁇ state, isopropyl palmitate, isopropyl stearate, butyl stearate, dimethyl malonate, polyethylene glycol, t ⁇ ethylene glycol, lanolm, cocoa
  • Propellants such as tnchlorofluoromethane, dichlorodifluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, monochlorodifluoromethane, tnchlorot ⁇ fluoroethane, propane, butane, isobutane, dimethyl ether, carbon dioxide, nitrous oxide;
  • Solvents include, but are not limited to, ethyl alcohol, n-propanol, n-butanol, tert-butanol, ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, hexane, tetramethylurea, sulfolane, low molecular weight poly(ethylene oxide), glycerol, propylene glycol, 2-butoxyethanol, amyl alcohol, n-octanol, n- decanol, acetone, acetic acid, butyl acetate, methylene chlonde, isopropanol, acetone, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, dimethyl sulphoxide, dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran;
  • Powders such as chalk, talc, fullers earth, kaolm, starch, gums, colloidal silica, sodium polyacrylate, tefraalkyl- and/or tnalkyl-arylammomum smectites, chemically modified magnesium aluminum silicate, organically modified montmo ⁇ llonite clay, aluminum silicate, fumed silica, carboxyvmyl polymer, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, ethylene glycol monostearate.
  • the cosmetically acceptable vehicle will usually form from 10 to 99.9%, preferably from 50 to 99% by weight of the composition and can, in the absence of other cosmetic adjuncts, form the balance of the composition.
  • the topical compositions according to the invention may be provided in any suitable physical form, for example as low to moderate viscosity liquids, lotions, milks, mousses, dispersions, sprays, gels, foams, aerosols, and creams. These compositions may be produced by procedures well known to the skilled artisan.
  • the cosmetic compositions can be used m vanous manners as other known compositions in the art including but not limited to vanous nnse-off and leave-on applications such as hair shampoos, skm cleansers, skm lotions, hair conditioners, styling sprays, hair mousses, two-m-one shampoos, fabnc softeners, lotions, nail polishes, hair serums, hair dyes, hair waving, etc.
  • the contact time between the cosmetic composition of the present invention and the substrate vanes between 10 seconds and about 1 hour, preferably between 20 seconds and 30 minutes, more preferably between 30 seconds and 15 minutes.
  • the cosmetic composition of the present invention can be formulated as a fluid, lotion, fluid cream or cream having a viscosity from 500 to 100,000 mPas or above.
  • the composition can be packaged in a suitable container to suit its viscosity and intended use by the consumer
  • a lotion or fluid cream can be packaged in a bottle or a roll-ball applicator or a propellant-dnven aerosol device or a container fitted with a pump suitable for hand or finger operation.
  • a non-deformable bottle or squeeze container such as a tube or a lidded jar
  • the topical product or composition of the present invention may include an activator as descnbed above
  • the inventive composition must be designed to prevent premature activation of the protected thiol compound pnor to use.
  • the protected thiol compound and the activator may be placed in separate chambers in a dual chamber package, or either of the 'hook' compound or the activator can be placed with shear sensitive (or other induced release) capsules which rupture p ⁇ or or du ⁇ ng use.
  • the protected thiol compound and the activator can be placed in separate packages to enable pre-mixmg or sequential application by the consumer.
  • typical dual chamber packages see PCT Application WO 96/02230, by Unilever PLC, published February 1, 1996. (Herein mco ⁇ orated by reference.)
  • the cosmetic active of the present invention can be supplied in the punfied form, i.e., as a powder, crystal, wax, gum or liquid.
  • the punfied cosmetic active could be intermixed with any of the above suitable earners either pnor to or simultaneous to the usage by the consumer.
  • the punfied cosmetic active could be placed withm a compartment that is separated from the earner by a bamer wall.
  • the barrier wall could be broken, disrupted or even removed to enable the punfied cosmetic active to come m contact with and mter-mix with the earner.
  • the topical composition of the present invention compnses at least one of the above descnbed protected thiol compounds, together with any additional ingredients which are normally to be found m cosmetic treatment compositions for use on hair, skm, or other substrates such as other fibers, textiles, fab ⁇ cs, or the like.
  • One or more of the protected thiol compounds may be used, the use of two or more being beneficial for example where a combination of cosmetic benefits is wanted, each denvable from a different cosmetic agent species.
  • compositions if desired or approp ⁇ ate may compnse stable emulsions or dispersions of the one or more functionahzed cosmetic agents which are designed to be water insoluble.
  • conventional means for achieving successful deposition and activation of the act ⁇ ve(s) may be required, for instance, an emulsion or a dispersion could be intermixed with a separate solvent solution via a dual phase package to enable solubihzation and subsequent activation du ⁇ ng usage
  • the topical composition according to the invention may include optional benefit materials and cosmetic adjuncts, as long as the benefit matenals or the adjuncts do not eliminate or substantially reduce the performance of the organosulfur functionahzed cosmetic agent.
  • the additional ingredients may include, for example dyes and colonng agents, fragrances; anionic, cationic, non-ionic, amphotenc or zwitte ⁇ onic surfactants; buffers, masking fragrances, dispersing agents, stabilizers, cationic polymers, perfumes, non-ionic polymers, anionic polymers, complex coacervates, complex coacervate capsules, metal salts, Lewis acids, buffering agents, particulate thickeners, polyme ⁇ c thickeners, wax thickeners, oils, emollients, humectants, moistunzers, dyes, dyes and colonng agents, enzymes, antibodies, preservatives, viscosity enhancers, gelling agents, chelators, silicones or other emulsifying agents
  • Nonlimiting examples of anionic lathenng surfactants useful m the compositions of the present invention are disclosed m McCutcheon's, Detergents and Emulsifiers, North Amencan edition (1990), published by The Manufactunng Confectioner Publishing Co.; McCutcheon's, Functional Matenals, North Amencan Edition (1992); and U.S. Patent No. 3,929,678, to Laughlm et al., issued December 30, 1975, all of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference.
  • anionic lathenng surfactants include those selected from the group consisting of alkyl and alkyl ether sulfates, sulfated monoglycendes, sulfonated olefins, alkylaryl sulfonates, p ⁇ mary or secondary alkanesulfonates, alkyl sulfosuccinates, acyltaurates, acyhsethionates, alkyl glyceryl ether sulfonates, sulfonated methyl esters, sulfonated fatty acids, alkyl phosphates, acylglutamates, acylsarcosinates, alkyl sulfoacetates, acylated peptides, alkyl ether carboxylates, acyllactylates, anionic fluorosurfactants, and mixtures thereof.
  • Suitable nonionic surfactants include polyoxyalkylene alcohol surfactants, especially alkyl polyethyleneglycol ethers, alkyl polypropyleneglycol ethers, alkyl polyethyleneglycol esters, and alkyl polypropyleneglycol esters and mixtures thereof.
  • Suitable amphotenc surfactant components for use in the shampoo composition herein include those which are known for use in shampoo compositions or other personal care cleansing composition, and which contain a group that is anionic at the pH of the shampoo composition Concentration of such surfactant components m the shampoo composition preferably ranges from about 0.5 % to about 20%, preferably from about 1% to about 10%, more preferably from about 2% to about 5% by weight of the composition
  • Examples of amphotenc surfactants suitable for use in the shampoo composition herein are descnbed in U S Patents 5,104,646 (Bohch Jr et al ), U S Patent 5,106,609 (Bohch Jr et al ), which desc ⁇ ptions are inco ⁇ orated herein by reference
  • Examples of amphoteric detersive surfactants which can be used in the compositions of the present invention are those which are broadly descnbed as denvatives of aliphatic secondary and tertiary amines m which the aliphatic radical can
  • amphotenc surfactants sometimes classified as zwittenonic surfactants, such as betames can also be useful in the present invention
  • Such zwitte ⁇ onics are considered as amphotencs in the present invention where the zwitte ⁇ onic has an attached group that is anionic at the pH of the composition
  • betaines useful herein include the high alkylbetames, such as cocodimethylcarboxymethylbetaine, cocoamidopropylbetaine, cocobetame, laurylamidopropylbetame, oleylbetaine, lauryldimethylcarboxymethylbetame, lauryldimethyl- alpha-carboxyethylbetaine, cetyldimethylcarboxymethylbetaine, lauryl-b ⁇ s-(2- hydroxyethyl)carboxymethylbetame, stearyl-b ⁇ s-(2-hydroxypropyl)carboxymethyl betame, oleyldimethyl-gamma
  • the sulfobetaines may be represented by cocodimethyl sulfopropylbetame, stearyldimethylsulfopropylbetaine, lauryldimethylsulfoethylbetame, lauryl-b ⁇ s-(2- hydroxyethyl)sulfopropylbetame and the like; amidobetaines and amidosulfobetames, wherein the RCON(CH ) radical is attached to the nitrogen atom of the betame are also useful m this invention Most preferred for use herein is cocoamidopropylbetaine.
  • Suitable additional cosmetic benefit agents include the following. (1) conditioning agents, i.e., mate ⁇ als which impart one or more visual or tactile benefits such as softness, smoothness, shme, non-flyaway, anti-static, ease of dry and/or wet combing, e g , cationic surfactants, cationic polymers, volatile and/or non-volatile silicones or derivatives thereof, quaternary ammonium salts having at least one long chain alkyl or alkenyl group, protein hydrolysates, quaternized protein hydrolysates, perfluoropolyether mate ⁇ als, fatty alcohols, and mixtures thereof;
  • conditioning agents i.e., mate ⁇ als which impart one or more visual or tactile benefits such as softness, smoothness, shme, non-flyaway, anti-static, ease of dry and/or wet combing, e g , cationic surfactants, cationic polymers, volatile and/or non-volatile silicones or derivatives thereof,
  • stylmg/settmg bodying agents i.e., matenals which give enhanced body and fell to the hair or other fibers or enable them to hold a given shape or style, e.g., various polymers, gums and resins, for example adhesive and/or resinous hydrocarbon mate ⁇ als such as per- alk(en)ylhydrocarbon materials, sihcone/siloxane gums or resins, waxes, chitosan and denvatives, salts and complexes thereof, and mixtures thereof;
  • antidandruff agents e.g., zmc pyndmethione, Octopirox®, chmbazole;
  • sun-protective matenals e.g. sunscreens, especially UV absorbers
  • (v ⁇ ) hair growth promoters or regulators e.g. diacylglycerols, glucarolactams, glucarolactones, Mmoxidol®;
  • (vm) moistunzers e.g. 2-hydroxyalkano ⁇ c acids, acid soap and complexes thereof, and other emollients, occlusives, humectants;
  • oils e.g. silicone oils, oleic acid, hydrocarbons, isopropyl my ⁇ state, oleyl alcohol, oleates, squalene, sunflower seed oil, rapeseed oil, other plant de ⁇ ved oils, mineral oil;
  • (xin) antimicrobial agents e.g. antibacte ⁇ al or anti-mfestive agents
  • adjunct mate ⁇ als commonly used m cosmetic compositions, e.g., buffenng and/or pH adjusting agents, perfumes, colorings, preservatives, proteins etc.
  • PEI's polyethylenimines
  • (xvn) metal salts compnsmg alkaline earth metals such as magnesium and calcium, transition metals such as zmc, manganese and copper, and the group LTIA metals such as Al.
  • the use of these metal salts for hair treatment is disclosed m WO9609030 and WO9703640 where they are claimed to form metal-sulfur bonds with the hair for use m hair styling and restyhng.
  • Such metal salts could conceivably be employed to complex and interact with the cosmetic active of the present invention. Such interactions should not interfere too greatly with the performance of the cosmetic actives and could potentially positively influence the performance, i.e., metals could complex with the sulfur atom withm cosmetic active and facilitate or induce activation m the form of thiol release
  • chelating agents including disodium EDTA and tetrasodium EDTA.
  • Chelators could enhance the diffusion and adso ⁇ tion by binding to and removing metals present in hard water such as calcium and magnesium. Such hard water ions could conceivably complex with certain ionized "hooks" of the present invention electrostatically and inhibit their solubility.
  • (xix) hydrotropes such as ammonium xylene sulfate.
  • hydrotropes could improve performance by freeing up the "hook” compounds du ⁇ ng dilution to facilitate improved binding to the substrate.
  • dispersing aids which may encompass, but are not limited to, non-iomc surfactants, amphotenc surfactants, and ionic surfactants. If the "hooks" of the present invention are inco ⁇ orated withm a non-aqueous mat ⁇ x of as an insoluble dispersion, dispersing aids could be utilized to enhance solubihzation and subsequent activation.
  • Ion-pair ingredients For certain ionic "hooks" of the present invention, compounds could be employed that ion-pair with the "hooks” including, but not limited to cations, anions, quaternized ammonium compounds, amphotenc compounds, and metals. Such charged species could be utilized to manipulate the diffusion, adso ⁇ tion and the binding of the "hook" compounds of the present invention.
  • Drying agents designed to minimize residual levels of water m non-aqueous solvent, including, but not limited to molecular sieves.
  • the pH of the compositions of the present invention is frequently important in achieving optimized chemiso ⁇ tion of the protected thiol compound.
  • the most suitable pH for a given composition may depend pnncipally on the type and structure of the protecting group as it pertains to activation. For instance, many of the protecting group can be activated for improved performance via pH catalyzed hydrolysis. In these cases, the pH of the composition would need to be such that the molecular 'hook' is not activated pnor to usage.
  • the pH of the composition containing the molecular 'hook' can be manipulated, i.e., via mter-mixmg with separate pH activating composition, such that the molecular 'hook' is activated du ⁇ ng or immediately p ⁇ or to usage.
  • the protecting groups of the present invention are to be used withm a pH range from about 1 to about 12, preferably from about 3 to about 11, more preferably from about 4 to about 10.
  • the composition would need to be non-aqueous and essentially free of water or moisture to such a degree that prohibits significant hydrolysis induced activation prior to usage.
  • the water imparted to the composition during usage from the shower, bath or from the wetted substrate could provide the activation required to optimize the resulting chemiso ⁇ tion.
  • silicone composition which includes at least one polysiloxane or silicone resm, at least one linker, and at least one molecular hook.
  • said silicone composition typically imparts improved hair care benefits when added to hair care compositions.
  • the at least one linker is bound to both a molecular hook and to an atom of a polysiloxane or silicone resm.
  • the at least one linker is bound to a polysiloxane or silicone resm through a silicon, carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur atom, and most preferably to a silicon atom.
  • linkers may be bound to a polysiloxane or silicone resm through more than one type of atom, for example through both silicon and carbon atoms.
  • the present invention compnses at least one polysiloxane or silicone resm having the formula:
  • M' has the formula:
  • D has the formula: R 3 S ⁇ 0 2 /2
  • T has the formula:
  • T ' has the formula:
  • Z independently at each occurrence, represents the molecular hook
  • X independently at each occurrence, represents the linker.
  • alkyl as used in various embodiments of the present invention is intended to designate both normal alkyl, branched alkyl, aralkyl, and cycloalkyl radicals.
  • Normal and branched alkyl radicals are preferably those containing from 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, and include as illustrative non-hmiting examples methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, tertiary- butyl, pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl.
  • Cycloalkyl radicals represented are preferably those contaimng from 4 to about 12 nng carbon atoms.
  • cycloalkyl radicals include cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, mefhylcyclohexyl, and cycloheptyl.
  • Preferred aralkyl radicals are those containing from 7 to about 14 carbon atoms; these include, but are not limited to, benzyl, phenylbutyl, phenylpropyl, and phenylethyl.
  • Aryl radicals used in the vanous embodiments of the present invention are preferably those containing from 6 to 14 nng carbon atoms.
  • aryl radicals include phenyl, biphenyl, and naphthyl.
  • An illustrative non-limiting example of a halogenated moiety suitable for R ⁇ groups is tnfluoropropyl.
  • polysiloxanes or silicone resms of the present invention are typically prepared by the hydrosilylation of an organohydrogen silicone having the formula
  • subscnpts a, c, d, e, f and g are zero or a positive integer, subject to the limitation that the sum of the subscnpts b, d and f is one or greater, where M has the formula
  • T has the formula:
  • T ⁇ has the formula:
  • Hydrosilylation is typically accomplished m the presence of a suitable hydrosilylation catalyst.
  • the catalyst preferred for use with these compositions are descnbed m U.S. Pat. Nos 3,715,334; 3,775,452; and 3,814,730 to Karstedt. Additional background concerning the art may be found at J. L. Spier, "Homogeneous Catalysis of Hydrosilation by Transition Metals, m Advances in Organometallic Chemistry, volume 17, pages 407 through 447, F. G. A. Stone and R West editors, published by the Academic Press (New York, 1979). Persons skilled in the art can easily determine an effective amount of platinum catalyst. Generally, an effective amount ranges from about 0.1 to 50 parts per million of the total organopolysiloxane composition.
  • the organohydrogen silicone compounds that are the precursors to the compounds of the present invention may be prepared by the process disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,698,654 herewith specifically inco ⁇ orated by reference.
  • the '654 patent discloses a sequential catalysis of the ring opening polymenzation of cyclic organosiloxanes using a base catalyst that can be neutralized by a subsequent redistnbution and condensation catalyst such as a Lewis acid catalyst, preferably a phosphonitnhc compound, that permits the rapid synthesis of functionahzed and poly- functionahzed silicone copolymers.
  • the subscnpts descnbmg the organohydrogen siloxane precursor and the hydrosilylation adduct of the present invention are integers as required by the vanous rules of chemical stoichiometry.
  • the subscnpts will assume non-mtegral values, for the mixtures.
  • the rest ⁇ ctions on the subscnpts heretofore descnbed for the stoichiometnc subscnpts of these compounds are for the pure compounds, not the mixtures.
  • the silicone composition typically compnses at least one compound of the following formulas, (I), (IT), (ILL), (X), (XI), and
  • R 3 ⁇ is independently at each occurrence a hydrogen atom, C 1-22 alkyl, Cj. 22 alkoxy, C . 22 alkenyl, C 6 . 14 aryl, and C 6 - 2 alkyl-substituted aryl, and C 6 .
  • aralkyl which groups may be halogenated, for example, flourinated to contain fluorocarbons
  • Z independently at each occurrence, represents a molecular hook
  • X independently at each occurrence, represents a linker
  • "m” in each formula has a value in a range between about 0 and about 13,000, preferably about 0 and about 1000, more preferably between about 1 and about 250, still more preferably between about 5 and about 150, even more preferably between about 10 and about 100, and most preferably between about 20 and about 50
  • "n” in each formula has a value in a range between about 0 and about 13,000, more preferably between about 0 and about 50, more preferably between about 1 and about 20, still more preferably between about 2 and about 10, and most preferably between about 2 and about 5
  • "m+n” in each formula has a value in a range between about 1 and about 13,000, preferably between about 3 and about 70, more preferably between about 5 to about 50, and most preferably between about 15 and about 50
  • the polysiloxane or silicone resin typically has a molecular weight ranging from about 100 to about 1,000,000, preferably from about 250 to about 50,000, more preferably from about 500 to about 25,000, and most preferably from about 500 to about 7,000.
  • the at least one polysiloxane or silicone resin typically has a viscosity in a range between about 20 centipoise and about 2,500,000 centipoise (about 0.02 to about 2500 Pas).
  • the number of X-Z moieties on a polysiloxane or silicone resin in the composition is at least one Ln preferred embodiments the average number of X-Z moieties on a polysiloxane or silicone resin is between about 1 and about 100. more preferably between about 1 and about 20, still more preferably between about 1 and about 6, and most preferably between about 3 and about 6.
  • a polysiloxane- or silicone resm-contammg composition compnses a preponderance of a specific linear, branched, cross-linked, or cyclic polysiloxane or silicone resin.
  • a polysiloxane- or silicone resm-contammg composition compnses a mixture of polysiloxanes and/or silicone resins which may include linear, branched, cross-lmked, and cyclic species.
  • suitable compositions may comp ⁇ se one or more polysiloxanes and/or silicone resms which may contain adventitious amounts of other species, for example ansmg du ⁇ ng the synthesis process for said polysiloxanes and/or silicone resms, for example at a level of about 0.0001 wt.% to about 5 wt.% based on total sihcon- contaming species.
  • suitable compositions may contain adventitious amounts of D 4 , or species containing Si-H, Si-OH, and/or Si-O-alkyl bonds.
  • the molecular hook may be a heterocyclic pyndinium compound (TV), a heterocyclic tnazmium (V), or a heterocyclic pynmidimum compound (VI) :
  • Y represents optional substituents on the heterocyclic nng or nng system
  • X represents the linker
  • Q " represents a countenon
  • A is defined below.
  • A, A 1 , A 2 , A 3 , and A 4 each represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following, a straight, branched or mono- or polycychc aliphatic, mono- or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0 to 15 heteroatoms, especially oxygen (O), nitrogen (N), sulfur (S), phosphorus (P), silicon (Si) and can inco ⁇ orate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or perfluoro substitution.
  • a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following, a straight, branched or mono- or polycychc aliphatic, mono- or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atom
  • the counte ⁇ on, Q " can include hahdes, borates, phosphates, tosylates, mesylates, tnflates, and other counte ⁇ ons known to those skilled m the art.
  • the linker compnses a C ⁇ -C 50 alkyl, aryl, or alkylaryl group, or C ⁇ -C 50 heteroaryl group containing one or more heteroatoms, and is optionally functionahzed.
  • Optional functionalization on the linker includes ketones, alkoxys, esters, amides, trifluoromethyl, halogens, mtnles and other polar functional groups known to those skilled m the art.
  • the linker is typically denved from a linker precursor which compnses a linker bound to a leaving group (L)
  • Illustrative leaving groups include hahdes such as chlonde, bromide and iodide, tosylate, mesylate, phosphate; cyclic leaving groups (that is, those m which the leaving group remains bound in the linker) such as epoxy or other cyclic leaving group containing at least one heteroatom; and other leaving groups known to those skilled in the art
  • Preferred leaving groups are bromide and iodide, with iodide being particularly preferred
  • the leaving group is replaced by a molecular hook, so that the linker becomes bound to a molecular hook
  • the at least one linker precursor may be combined with the at least molecular hook before combining with a polysiloxane or silicone resm
  • the at least one linker precursor may be combined with a polysiloxane or silicone resin before combining with the at least molecular hook
  • the linker precursor has the formula (VII)
  • D compnses a group bound to a polysiloxane or a silicone resm
  • Ar is an aromatic or heteroaromatic group, optionally substituted with one or more substituents
  • Y is a substituent
  • L is as defined above
  • n has a value between zero and the number of free valence sites on the aromatic or heteroaromatic ring
  • suitable aromatic and heteroaromatic groups in linkers include phenyl, btphenyl, toluyl, naphthyl, py ⁇ dyl, qumolyl, t ⁇ azmyl, py ⁇ midyl, pyndazmyl, furyl, furoyl, and thienyl.
  • substituents (Y) which may be bound to said aromatic or heteroaromatic group include Ci 22 straight chain, branched, cycloahphatic, or aralkyl, C ⁇ u aryl, fluoro, chloro, bromo, lodo, nitro, nitroso, nit ⁇ le, trifluoromethyl, t ⁇ fluoropropyl, alkyloxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyl, alkylamido, alkyl ether, aryl ether, and similar electron-withdrawing, electron-donating, and electron-neutral groups
  • the "D” group may compnse a straight chain, branched, cycloahphatic, or aralkyl group which optionally may contain a functional group, said functional group being bound to D in a pendent position or separating D from the aromatic or heteroaromatic group, or separating D from a polysiloxane or a silicone resm, or m more than one of these
  • D groups include Ci 22 alkyl and preferably C 2 3 alkyl
  • functional groups which may be present with D include carbonyl, alkylcarbonyl, oxycarbonyl, alkyloxycarbonyl, nit ⁇ le, amido, alkylamido, t ⁇ fluoromethyl, and halogen, such as chloro, bromo, and/or fluoro.
  • linkers are shown m formulas (VLLI) and (LX) :
  • Sihcone-containing compositions compnsing at least one polysiloxane or silicone resin, at least one linker, and at least one molecular hook typically impart cosmetic and other benefits m applications such as hair care (for example durable hair care benefit), textile care, cosmetics, oral care, and animal care.
  • the protected thiol compounds of the present invention when applied to a ammo acid based substrate, have improved uptake levels and reduced levels of fade or removal. That is the thiol functional groups demonstrate improved attachment of the functional group, R, to the amino acid based substrate and longer lasting attachment than alternative reactive technologies. These benefits are demonstrated without requinng addition steps of reducing or oxidizing the substrate which typically are required in the art to achieve durable cosmetic benefits.
  • Reduction as defined herein compnses chemical compositions and treatments that induce the nucleophihc cleavage of disulfide bonds m keratm substrates resulting in the formation of free thiol groups in the form of cysteinyl ammo acid residues. Reduction is employed m several commercial products and processes including the permanent-waving of human hair, human hair straightening, human hair depilation, and m the dyeing of wool with fiber reactive dyes.
  • thiols such as thioglycohc acid, thiolactic acid, cysteine, thioglycerol, thioglycohc hydrazide, thioglycolamide, and glycerol monothioglycolate
  • sulfides such as salts of hydrogen sulfide
  • m high temperature and alkali wherem the keratm is heated to around 100°C or above by a heating source or steam and wherein the keratm can be contacted with an alkaline solution
  • cyanide such as the salts of hydrogen cyanide
  • phosphines such as t ⁇ hydroxymethyl phosphine or its precursor, tetrahydroxymethyl phosphonium chloride
  • other miscellaneous reducing agents such as borohydnde, dithiomte, hydrosulfite, and sul
  • Reduction as defined herein generally refers to the above processes and compositions which reduce greater than 10% of the disulfide bonds in the keratmaceous substrate
  • the relative quantities of reduced versus unreduced keratin fiber depend on the type of reducing agent, its concentration (or degree of application in the case of heat), the solution-to-hair ratio, pH of the reaction medium, time of reaction, fiber diameter, and the condition of the hair
  • Oxidation as defined herein compnses chemical compositions and treatments that induce the oxidative cleavage of disulfide bonds in keratin substrates resulting in the formation of sulfonic acid groups in the form of cysteic acid amino acid residues. Oxidation is employed m several commercial products and processes including the bleaching of human hair, permanent dyeing of human hair with oxidation dyes, and in the dyeing of wool with fiber reactive dyes. Hydrogen peroxide is the p ⁇ nciple oxidizing agent used in most oxidizing compositions and is delivered liberally to the substrate as a 3 to 12% solution which may be alkaline.
  • Persulfates in the form of their sodium potassium and ammonium salts, may also be used to be mixed with the hydrogen peroxide just before use.
  • Other ingredients that may be additionally included in the composition include sodium percarbonate, sodium perborate, magnesium perborate, magnesium dioxide and banum bmoxide.
  • Oxidation as defined herein generally refers to the above processes and compositions which degrade greater than 10% of the disulfide bonds in the keratmaceous substrate.
  • a more detailed discussion on disulfide oxidation can be found in the articles by Zahn and Robbms (Zahn, H. J. Soc. Cosmet. Chem. 17:687 (1966); Rabbins, C; Kelly, C. J. Soc. Cosmet. Chem. 20:555 (1969)).
  • both reduction and oxidation of ammo acid based substrates lead to irreparable damage to the substrate by virtue of their destructive chemical reactions.
  • both reduction and oxidation result in disulfide bond cleavage which has been shown to significantly reduce the wet tensile properties of human hair through 30% extension (Clarence Robbms book: Chemical and Physical Behaviour of Human Hair).
  • reduced hair has been shown to be less ⁇ gid in the wet state than unreduced hair (Bogaty, H. J. Soc. Cosmet. Chem.
  • the compounds of the invention can be prepared by any of a number of procedures known to those skilled in the art. Several nonlimiting examples are descnbed herein below.
  • Alkylthio substituted py ⁇ dmes can be prepared by reaction of halopy ⁇ dmes with a variety of thiols in the form of metal salts [Takahashi, Saikachi, Akai, J Pharm Soc Japan, 1943, 63, 153, Adams, Ferreti, J Am Chem Soc , 1959, 81, 4927].
  • Another method of preparation involves alkylation of py ⁇ dmethiols [Marckwald, Klemm, Trabert, Ber., 1900, B33, 1156; Forrest, Walker, J. Chem. Soc, 1948, 1939].
  • Alkylthio substituted py ⁇ midines can be prepared by alkylation of mercaptopy ⁇ midmes [Southon, Pfeiderer, Chem. Ber., 1978, 111, 982; A. G. Geigy, Chem. Abstr , 1969, 70, 68418] or directly from halogenopynmidmes [Semga, Ichiba, Kanazawa, Nishigaki, J. Heterocyclic Chem , 1982, 30, 610].
  • Alkylthio substituted pyrazmes can be prepared from halogenopyrazmes and approp ⁇ ate sodium (or potassium) alkyl thiolate at elevated temperatures [Konakahara, Y. Takagi, Bull Chem. Soc. Japan, 1960, 80, 349].
  • the alternative method is alkylation of mercaptopyrazines [A. Albert, G.B. Barlm, J. Chem. Soc, 1962, 3129].
  • Alkylthio substituted pyndazmes can be prepared by treatment of halopy ⁇ dazmes with a thiol m the form of its alkali salt or with a thiol in the presence of base [Druey, K. Meier, K Eichenberger, Helv. Chim. Ada, 1954, 37, 121; M. Fujisaka, Y. Neno, H. Shinobara, E. Imoto, Bull Chem. Soc. Japan, 1964, 37, 1107; T. Hone, K. Kmjo, T. Ueda, Chem. Pharm. Bull , 1962, 10, 580].
  • Alkylthio substituted pyndimum denvatives can be prepared by quaternization of the corresponding pyndine alkyl thioethers and other methods.
  • Alkylthio substituted xanthenes can be prepared from thiols and xanthene with a suitable leaving group [K. J. Divakar, C.B. Reese, et. al., J. Chem. Soc, Perkin Trans 1, 1990 (6), 1753]
  • Alkylthio substituted py ⁇ midmium denvatives can be prepared by quaternization of the corresponding pynmidme alkylthioethers and other methods. [Deichmeister, Platoshknn, Khim. Geterosicl. Soedin., 1, 1961, 333; Brown, England, J. Chem. Soc. C, 1971, 2507; Ueda, Ohtsuka, Chem. Pharm. Bull, 21, 1973, 1451.]
  • Alkylthio substituted pyrazmmm denvatives can be prepared by quaternization of the corresponding pynmidme alkyl thioethers and other methods.
  • Alkylthio substituted furans can be prepared from the corresponding furan thiols and alkyl hahdes.
  • Alkylthio substituted pyrroles can be prepared by S-alkylation of 2- and 3-pyrroleth ⁇ ols under standard base-catalyzed conditions.
  • Alkylthio substituted thiophenes can be prepared by reacting the alkali salts of thiophene thiols with aliphatic halogen compounds.
  • aliphatic halogen compounds Thinmas, G. Singh, H. Ila, H. Junjappa, Tet. Lett , 30, 3093, 1989; W -D. Rudorf, A. Schierhorn, M Augustm, J Prakt Chem , 321, 1021, 1979; J Cymerman-Craig, J. W. Loder, Org Synth. 667, 1963; J. Cymerman-Craig, J. W. Loder, J Chem Soc, 237, 1954; E.J. Smutny, J Am Chem. Soc , 91, 208, 1969.]
  • Alkylthio substituted pyrazoles, the 3- and 5- denvatives can be prepared by the alkylation of the corresponding pyrazolethiones [Michaelis, Lachwitz, Chem. Ber , 1910, 43, 2106; Michaelis, /in., 1908, 283].
  • Alkylthio substituted isoxazoles can be prepared by alkylatmg the thio group at the 3 position of isoxazoles [A.Thuiller and JNialle, Bull.Soc. Chim. Fr., 1959, 1398; W. D. Rudrorf and M. Augustin, J. Prakt. Chem., 1978, 320, 585; : K. Tomita, S. Sugai and M.Saito, Chem. Pharm. Bull, 1979, 27, 2415; S. Sugai and K. Tomita, Chem. Pharm. Bull, 1980, 28, 552].
  • Alkylthio substituted isothiazoles can be prepared by alkylatmg both 3- and 5- mercaptoisothiazoles [K. R. H. Wooldridge, Adv. Heterocycl Chem., 1972, 14, 1; B. Torretta, G. Ronsisvalle, E. Bousquet, F. Guerrera and M. A. Siracusa, Gazz. Chim. Ital, 1980, 133; : K. Gewald, W. Radke and U. Hain, J. Prakt. Chem., 1980, 322, 1021].
  • Alkylthio substituted tnazoles can be prepared from the corresponding thiotnazoles by S- alkylation with vanous alkyl bromides [M.A. Weaver, R.R. Giles, Ger. Pat., 1970, 1,919,045; J. Hemdl, E. Schroeder, H.W. Kelm, Eur. J Med. Chem. - Chim. Ther., 1975, 10, 121.].
  • Alkylthio substituted 1 ,2,4-oxad ⁇ azoles can be prepared from the corresponding halogen oxadiazoles and thiols.
  • Alkylthio substituted 1,2,4-th ⁇ ad ⁇ azoles can be prepared via dipotassium cyanodithioimmocabonate followed by alkylation [W. A. Thaler and J. R. McDivitt, J. Org. Chem., 1971, 36, 10; : Badische Anilin und Soda-Fabrik A.-G., Br. Pat. 1 1 16198 (1968), (Chem. Abstr., 1968, 69, 86995)].
  • Alkylthio substituted pyrazohum denvatives can be prepared by reaction of the corresponding alkylthiopyrazoles with alkyl hahdes.
  • Alkylthio substituted tnazohum denvatives can be prepared from halogen derivatives of the corresponding t ⁇ azoles and lithium thiolates [M. Begtnup, Bull. Soc Chun. Belg , 1988, 573].
  • Alkylthio substituted azepines can be obtained from the corresponding halogen derivatives [W. Steghch, H. Bauek, B.M. Grosse, R. Leschke, T. Josten, J. Klem, J. Heterocycl. Chem , 1990, 107].
  • Alkylthio substituted thiepinium denvatives can be prepared from the corresponding thiepms and an alkylation agent [H. Hofmann, A. Molnar, Tetrahedron Lett , 1977, 1985; H. Hofmann, A. Molnar, C. Gottfent, Liebigs Ann. Chem., 1983, 425; H. Hofmann, H. Fisher, M. De Vnes, Z. Naturforsch, Mol B, 1990, 1573].
  • reaction solution was poured over cold ⁇ 2 0 (3 L) then extracted with CH 2 C1 2 (1 x 1 L and 1 x 500 mL)
  • CH 2 C1 2 (1 x 1 L and 1 x 500 mL
  • the combined extracts were washed with H 2 0 (750 mL) and saturated brine (750 mL), d ⁇ ed over Na 2 S0 4 , clanfied, then concentrated in vacuo to a green oil
  • This material was combined with similar material from a smaller reaction and passed through a pad of silica (750 g) packed with EtO Ac -hexanes (1: 1) then eluted with 1.1, 6 L; 2:1, 3 L; 3: 1, 4 L and finally EtOAc, 3 L.
  • the sp 2 protected thiol compounds of the present invention can be prepared by any of a number of procedures known to those skilled m the art.
  • the thiocarboxyhc acid denvatives can be prepared by reacting acyl chlorides with H 2 S or alkylthiols.
  • the carbamothioic acid derivatives can be prepared via hydrolysis of thiocyanates.
  • the dithiocarboxyhc acid derivatives can be prepared by treating carboxylic acids with P 4 S ⁇ o and a primary alcohol.
  • the carbonodithioic acid derivatives can be prepared by the addition of alcohols to carbon disulfide in the presence of base to form a salt of the acid and by imparting an alkyl halide to the reaction mixture to form the ester.
  • the carbamodithioic acid derivatives can be prepared by the addition of p ⁇ mary or secondary amines to carbon disulfide.
  • the compounds of the invention can be prepared by any of a number of procedures known to those skilled in the art.
  • the thioether compounds can be prepared by the treatment of a suitable alkyl halide with a thiol.
  • the thioacetal and dithioacetal compounds can be prepared by the treatment of suitable aldehydes and ketones with a thiol.
  • the compounds capable of undergoing heterolytic ⁇ -ehmmation can be prepared via nucleophihc addition of a thiol onto a suitable activated olefin in a Michael-type addition reaction.
  • Hexadecyl mercaptan (95%, 180 g, 661 mmol) was added, dropwise over 0.5 h, to a stirred mixture of methyl acrylate (60.0 g, 697 mmol) and benzyltnmethylammonium hydroxide (40 wt.% in methanol, 400 mg, 1.0 mmol). The resulting warm ( ⁇ 60°C) solution was stirred for one additional hour then volatiles were removed m vacuo at 90°C.
  • Ammonium chlonde (152.9 g, 2.858 mol), 1 (225.0 g, 0.572 mol), water (2.8 L), methanol (3.8 L) were combined and mechanically stirred at 50°C, then powdered iron (95.9 g, 1.715 mol) was added portionwise over ten minutes.
  • the suspension was vigorously stirred at reflux for 2.5 hours, then hot filtered through a cehte pad.
  • the pad was nnsed with water (3 x 700 mL) and CH 2 C1 2 (5 x 700 mL).
  • the aqueous layer was extracted with CH 2 C1 2 (3 1 L), then concentrated to remove methanol and again extracted with CH 2 C1 2 (3 x 500 ml).
  • Tropyhum tetrafluoroborate (10.0 g, 0.056 mol) was ground and placed m a reaction flask with MeOH (100.0 mL). This suspension was stirred under argon for 10 mm at room temperature, and then n-hexadecanefhiol, (90%) (15.0 g, 0.052 mol) was added over 5 mm. The reaction mixture (suspension) was stirred for 2 h. At this point, TLC showed only a small amount of unreacted thiol. To the reaction mixture was added NaHC0 3 (8 g, 0.095 mol) followed by stimng for 15 min.
  • the metal mercaptides of the present invention can be prepared by a number of methods known to those who are skilled m the art.
  • R-S-Met-X n can be made by reactions of the type:
  • R-S-Met(M) m X n can be made by reactions of the type: Met(M) m X n+ 1 + RS " » ⁇ RSMet(M) m X n + X n "
  • metal mercaptides of the present invention can be made via the addition of the cosmetic thiol to a solution of salts of heavy metals. This can be accomplished by adding the thiol to an aqueous, hydroalcoholic or alcoholic solution of a salt of the metal. The formed mercaptides of the heavy metals may then precipitate. The precipitated mercaptide can then be filtered and washed with an aqueous, hydro-alcoholic or alcoholic solution containing some of the thiol to prevent hydrolysis [E. Reid, Organic Chemistry of Bivalent Sulfur, Volume I, 1958].
  • Thiol denvatives of non-metals and metalloids can be prepared from their hahdes in the presence of a hydrogen halide acceptor hydrogen halide acceptor or by using a metal thiolate, such as lead, where Et represents an ethyl group, Pb is lead, and the other symbols are as defined above [M. E. Peach, "Thiols as Nucleophiles", m The Chemistry of the Thiol Group, 1974, John Wiley and Sons, pp. 747.]:
  • the 2-n ⁇ trobenzyl denvatives can be prepared by reaction of the corresponding 2- nitrobenzyl hahde with a thiol m the presence of a base:
  • the 2-mtrobenzyloxycarbonyl denvatives can be prepared by the reaction of phosgene with the corresponding alcohol, i.e., 2-n ⁇ trobenzyl alcohol, 6-n ⁇ troveratryl alcohol, 2-n ⁇ trobenzhydrol, and 2,2'-d ⁇ mtrod ⁇ phenylmethanol.
  • the resulting acyl chloride can then be reacted with a thiol to yield the corresponding 2-n ⁇ trobenzyloxycarbonyl derivative:
  • Z 1 and Z 2 are H, or OCH 3 and Z 3 is H, C 6 H 5 or o-0 2 N-C 6 H 4 .
  • the 3,5-d ⁇ methoxybenzyloxycarbonyl group can be introduced by reacting 3,5- dimethoxybenzyl j9-n ⁇ trophenyl carbonate with a thiol:
  • ⁇ , ⁇ -d ⁇ methyl-3,5-d ⁇ methoxybenzyloxycarbonyl compounds can be prepared by the reaction of ⁇ , ⁇ -d ⁇ methyl-3,5-d ⁇ methoxybenzyloxycarbonyl azide with a thiol:
  • the 3 -nitrophenyloxycarbonyl compound can be prepared by reaction of 3- mtrophenol with phosgene to yield 3 -nitrophenyloxycarbonyl chloride The latter can then be reacted with a thiol •
  • the 4-methoxyphenacyl compound can be prepared by reaction of phenacyl bromide with a thiol:
  • the ⁇ -methylphenacyl compound can be prepared by reaction of alpha-methylphenacyl bromide with a thiol:
  • the tert-butyloxycarbonyl compound can be prepared by reaction of tert-butyloxycarbonyl chlonde with a thiol:
  • Linker represents any straight, branched or mono- or polycyclic aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can incorporate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or perfluoro substitution.
  • the hydnde terminated silicone polymer HMe S ⁇ -(OS ⁇ Me : )-OS ⁇ Me ⁇ (35 g, 53 56 mmol. Gelest) was weighed into a 250 mL round bottom flask containing a stir bar 2,6-d ⁇ -tert-butylphenol (26 mg, 489 ppm by weight) was added followed by 51 ppm platinum in the form of Karstedt ' s catalyst (GE Silicones Product, 10 2% platinum by weight)
  • the pale vellow solution was placed m a 50°C oil bath Vinylbenzylchlo ⁇ de (16 8 mL, 1 19.2 mmol, Aldrich) w as added slowly dropwise by sy ⁇ nge with stirring The solution quickly became cloudy yellow and remained that way until about one mmute after the addition was complete.
  • This "on-chain" benzylchlonde-substituted silicone polymer (31.32 g, 12 95 mmol) was added to a 250 mL round bottom flask containing a stir bar mside a helium-filled dry box. To this was added 20 mL acetone (d ⁇ ed over dnente) and sodium iodide (5.46 g, 36 39 mmol, dned under vacuum at 1 10°C) as a solid. The solution became cloudy and quickly precipitated sodium chloride.
  • reaction with the pynmidme thione can be performed under air with solvent used as received with the same results. See Scheme 2.
  • the distribution of the on-cham substitution is random, not blocked as depicted schematically. However, the invention is not limited to randomly distributed polymer.
  • the hydnde substituted silicone resm MH 2 Q (101 05g, 0.932 mol Si-H) was weighed into a 500 mL round-bottom flask containing a stir bar. 2,6-di-tert-butylphenol (61 0 mg, 529 ppm by weight) was added followed by 37 6 ppm of platinum m the form of Karstedt's catalyst (GE Silicones Product 89023, 10 0% platinum by weight) The mixmre was placed m a 55°C oil bath and vinylbenzylchlo ⁇ de (14 30 g, 93.7 mmol, Aldnch) was added dropwise over a penod of one hour.
  • the benzylchlo ⁇ de-functionahzed resm was converted to the pynmidmium substituted material as descnbed in Example 3 1.
  • the product was isolated in 87.8% yield (25.9 g) as a viscous dark orange liquid. Hair care benefits.
  • treated hair switches (4 grams) were contacted with formulations containing the pynmidimum-substiiuied silicone polymer described in Example 3 1 which is referred to as the "3Hook Polymer”. Following treatment and simulated consumer use, combing forces were measured using a Reed Combing Machine.
  • the protected thiol compound of the present invention can be used in a vanety of ways m hair care compositions.
  • the cosmetic actives of the present invention can be applied directly to the hair m a alcohol/solvent/water solution compnsing:
  • Hydroalcoholic solvent 0 to 95.00% pH modifier, i.e , NaOH or citric acid pH 3 to 10*
  • pH will vary based on the particular "hook" compound of use and can be adjusted either just pnor to treatment with hair or simultaneously with the treatment of hair.
  • the hair is washed or nnsed to remove excess solvent.
  • the resulting protected thiol cosmetic active will be delivered and bound to the hair permanently, e.g benefit will last beyond 40 to 80 or more shampoos.
  • a simple non-hmiting dye composition using the protected thiol compounds of the present invention compnses the following composition ranges (depending on what colour is desired): Modified D&C Violet No. 2 of Example 21 0.00% to 3.00%
  • a simple non-hmitmg conditioning composition using a protected thiol compound of the present invention compnses:
  • the protected thiol compounds can be achieved with any of the protected hooks descnbed herein.
  • the protected thiol compounds of the present inventions can be applied in diffenng matnces and formulas as descnbed previously herein.
  • the protected thiol compounds may also be added to technologies currently well known in the art to treat substrates such as hair, teeth, finger nails, textiles, and animal fur.
  • substrates such as hair, teeth, finger nails, textiles, and animal fur.
  • Nonlimiting examples of such compositions are descnbed m the references below, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety:
  • Hair styling compositions - U.S. Patent No. 5,166,276 (Hayama et al.) issued November 24, 1992; U.S. Patent No. 5,565,193 (Midha et al.) October 15, 1996; and U.S. Patent No. 5,658,557 (Bohch et al.) issued August 19, 1997.
  • Hair coloring compositions - U.S. Patent No 4,197,865 (Jacquet et al.) issued April 15, 1980, U S. Patent No. 4,125,367 (Bugaut et al.) issued November 14, 1978, U.S. Patent No. 5,114,429 (Jumno et al.) issued May 19,1992, and U.S. Patent No. 5,279,620 (Jumno et al.) issued January 18, 1994.
  • Nail polish and nail polish subcoat compositions U.S. Patent 4,179,304 (Rossomando) issued December 18, 1979, U.S. Patent 5,538,717 (LaPote ⁇ e) issued July 23, 1996, and U.S. Patent 5,639,447 (Patel) issued June 17, 1997, U.S. Patent 5,567,428 (Hughes) issued October 22, 1996. Toothpaste compositions - U.S. Patent 4,254,101(Denny) issued March 3, 1981, and U.S. Patent 4,314,990 (Denny et al.) issued February 9, 1982, and PCT Application No. WO 96/15767 (Unilever PLC) published May 30, 1996. Textile dye and treatment compositions -
  • Water Q.S. can be applied simultaneously with a 5% solution of thioglycohc acid.
  • a preferred embodiment is a kit wherem the dye solution and the thioglycohc acid are packaged in separate chambers of a dual chamber package and delivered simultaneously from the package.

Abstract

This invention relates to a topical composition for treating amino acid based substrates comprising a protected thiol compound having the formula R—(S—Pr)m where R is a functional group, S is sulfur, and Pr is a heterocyclic protecting group, and m is an integer between 1 and 100. The invention further relates to systems which comprise this protected thiol compound and an activating mechanism. The protected thiol compounds of the present invention may be used in hair care compositions, textile care compositions, cosmetic compositions, oral care compositions, skin care, nail care, laundry care, acne care and animal care compositions. A preferred embodiment of the present invention provides a silicone composition and method for making. The composition comprises a polysiloxane or silicone resin, at least one linker, and at least one molecular hook.

Description

TOPICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING PROTECTED FUNCTIONAL THIOLS
TECHNICAL FIELD
The present invention relates to topical compositions for treating amino acid based substrates. The topical compositions comprise cosmetic or therapeutic actives that have been bound to a protected thiol which acts as a molecular 'hook' to impart "permanent" benefits to the ammo acid based substrates. The ammo acid based substrates can include, for example, protemaceous mateπals such as keratm, as found in human hair, animal fur, velus hair on skm, finger and toe nails; vanous animal body parts, such as horns, hooves and feathers; other naturally occurring protein containing mateπals, such as wool; and synthetic polymers. Of particular interest are compositions which deliver and attach cosmetic actives to human hair.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
It is well known in the art that ammo-acid based fibers, particularly hair, can be treated with agents that deliver one or more cosmetic benefits, such as conditioning, styling or setting. The conventional cosmetic products which have been known and used commercially have relied upon two key factors: deposition and retention. The cosmetic actives must first be physically deposited onto the hair fiber where the active imparts a benefit to a sufficient degree. Secondly, it is essential that the cosmetic actives be retained on the hair beyond the completion of the treatment. For example, when hair is πnsed to remove unwanted excess composition (e.g., a conditioner) a sufficient amount of the cosmetic active (humectant, moistuπzer, etc.) remains bonded to the hair so as to maintain the desired cosmetic benefits.
The bonding of the cosmetic active mateπal to the hair is generally of the nature of physico-chemical mtermolecular forces, e.g., physisorption. Such physical forces compπse, for example, hydrogen bonding, electrostatic interactions, van der Waals interactions and the like. As an example, cationic cosmetic agents, generally of the quaternary ammonium type, are known to bond to hair by virtue of the interaction of their cations with anionic ammo acid residues within keratin, e.g., glutamic acid, aspartic acid, cysteic acid etc. A major problem, however, with physisorption is the inevitable short lived retention of the cosmetic agent on hair. This is due to the relatively weak physical forces which bind the cosmetic to hair and which are easily disrupted by other treatments, e g washing And, given the frequent need for treating hair, performance retention is difficult to achieve and generally does not last in excess of the period between washes.
One approach that has been disclosed in the art to overcome the above problem to provide truly durable or "permanent" cosmetic benefits to hair that are retained through multiple washes is to utilize molecular "hooks" to chemically bond cosmetic actives to hair keratin, e.g., chemisorption. Chemisorption results in a permanent juncture that is essentially resistant to physical wear from subsequent washings or physical abrasion. Two conventional approaches to achieve chemisorption compπse the use of either electrophihc reactive moieties or thiol reactive moieties attached to the cosmetic active. Electrophihc reactive moieties are designed to react with thiol functional groups present m hair and thiol reactive moieties are designed to react with electrophihc functional groups within the hair to create a covalent bond.
U.S. Patent 5,523,080 issued to Gough et al. on June 4, 1996, U.S. Patent 5,211,942 issued to Deppert et al. on May 18, 1993, and UK Patent Application GB2197887 published on June 2, 1988, all disclose the use of electrophihc moieties. These electrophihc chemistπes include the use of azlactone, (haloalkyl)tπalkylammonιum salts, and acyl hahdes. All of these molecular hooks have potential to react with hair via an electrophihc mechanism which necessitates sufficient nucleophihc functional groups present within the keratm structure with which to react to a sufficient degree to achieve the desired durable benefits. For hair, this poses a dilemma in that it is generally known that hair does not naturally possess a sufficient concentration of nucleophihc functional groups under consumer mild conditions to dπve the reaction. However, it is also generally known that by chemically reducing the disulfide bonds present with the cystine ammo acid residues of hair, in a manner analogous to cold waving, sufficient quantities of nucleophihc cystine residues can be produced. Pre-reduction of hair, to enable the chemical reaction with suitable electrophihc cosmetic actives, is illustrated below in reactions (a) and (b). Ker represents keratm protein, R-X represents an alkyl halide electrophihc cosmetic active, R represents a cosmetic agent and X" is a halide anion such as bromide or chloπde.
Reduction
Ker S S Ker »- 2 Ker SH
(a) Ker SH + R X *~ Ker S R + X"
While electrophihc cosmetic actives have been demonstrated effective at providing durable cosmetic benefits to hair, the approach has disadvantages that arise from the required pre- reduction step First, the reduction step is known to be a very harsh chemical process that imparts considerable damage to hair Second, the effective reducing agents are typically mercaptans of low molecular weight and are odiferous. The pre-reduction process generates unpleasant malodor that remains on the hair for greater than a week time m most instances Thirdly, in addition to unpleasant malodor and resulting hair damage, the required pre-reduction imparts an additional step to the process with attendant added inconvenience to the user
U S Patent 5,087,733 and U S Patent 5,206,013 both issued to Deppert et al on February 11, 1992 and Apπl 27, 1993 respectively, as well as U S Patent 4,973,475 issued to Schnetzmger and Ciaudelh on November 27, 1990, descπbe the use of quaternary ammonium thiols which fall under the general class of nucleophihc reactive actives Such nucleophihc actives are generally intended to react with cystine ammo acid residues present within hair via formation of a mixed disulfide covalent linkage as is demonstrated in the chemical equation (c).
R— SH + Ker— S— S-Ker *~ Ker— S~ S— R + Ker-SH (c)
Ker represents keratm and R-SH represents a suitable nucleophihc active where R is a cosmetic agent and -SH representing a nucleophihc moiety. It is generally known that thiols are the preferred nucleophihc reactive moieties that possess enough reactive strength to chemically bond with the disulfide bond of cystine, Ker-S-S-Ker, under safe and mild consumer conditions (e.g , relatively non toxic, less than 120°F, pH 2 to 11). Most other prospective nucleophihc molecular handles are either highly toxic (e g , selenols), or are unreactive under mild conditions (e.g , alkoxides with pKa ~ 15).
There are two major drawbacks to the use of nucleophihc thiols as reactive moieties to form covalent bonds with keratm. First, thiol nucleophihc moieties are known to be unstable in the presence of air. Atmosphere induced oxidation of the thiols to the corresponding, and unreactive, disulfide as is shown in the following equation (d) where R-SH represents a suitable nucleophihc cosmetic active R being an alkyl cosmetic agent and -SH representing the nucleophihc moiety:
R-SH + R-SH °mSm > R- S- S-R (d)
Such oxidative deactivation of the nucleophihc thiol moieties severely limits their mode of usage. Thus, nucleophihc thiols are generally not stable enough to be utilized as such m a large majoπty of current product forms, 1 e . re-sealable hair care packages widely used for shampoos, rmse-off conditioners etc Second, the nucleophihc thiol moiety has very little affinity for hair keratin and has very low aqueous solubility, both of which hinder its performance in generating durable cosmetic benefits, especially when attached to hydrophobic, insoluble cosmetic actives, 1 e , hydrocarbon conditioners, m-soluble polymers etc
Despite major efforts, however, the art has not yet provided molecular "hooks" that provide durable cosmetic benefits to hair that last beyond twenty shampoos and which do not necessitate the damaging cold waving of hair, 1 e. hair reduction, while being oxidatively stable in solution for long term storage m a variety of currently used product forms, e.g., πnse of conditioners, two- m-one shampoos, etc.
The present invention is concerned with topical compositions compnsing classes of compounds containing at least one thiol in a protected form, which can be released to provide a - SH or -S" group pπor or simultaneous to use These protected thiols are referred to herein as "hooks" It is understood that withm the scope of this invention that functional thiols as represented herein include both the protonated thiol, R-SH, and unprotonated thiolate, R-S"
It has now been discovered that, surpπsmgly, such "hooks", R-(S-Pr)m, provide durable cosmetic benefits, when applied to ammo-acid based substrates without a damaging cold-waving process, that last beyond twenty shampoos. It has also been discovered that the molecular "hooks" of the present invention provide improved oxidative stability versus conventional thiols by virtue of the appended protecting moiety to the thiol group that reduces the oxidative susceptibility of the sulfur atom(s). Furthermore, it has been found that these molecular "hooks" significantly outperform conventional nucleophihc thiol hooks in providing durable cosmetic benefits. While not being bound by theory, the latter observed effect is believed to be due to the unexpected high affinity for keratm provided by certain polaπzable electrophihc groups which offer improved solubility and possibly even electrostatic interaction with the charged keratmaceous substrate. Presumably, such greater affinity affords enhanced diffusion and adsorption to the fiber by the cosmetic active enabling greater opportunity for binding.
The 'hooks' of the present invention enable the achievement of durable cosmetic benefits that are resistant to cleansing or shampooing from essentially a non-damagmg process that is void of cold waving. The binding of the cosmetic actives provided by these molecular 'hooks' is to such a degree of durability that the measured cosmetic benefits will remain in hair for multiple shampoo cycles, e.g. eight to twenty or more. While not being restricted by theory, it is believed that such a high degree of durability is due to the formation of covalent bonds between the cosmetic active and the keratmaceous substrate. This bond formation may occur in either of two ways. First, the protected thiol compound can be mixed with a activating release agent to form the free functional thiol, reaction (e) The free thiol will then react with the substrate thereby attaching the functional group, reaction (f).
R- S — Pr + Release Agent * R— S" (e)
2 R— s" + Ker— S — S~ Ker - 2 Ker — S— S — R -r Ker-SH (f)
R represents the cosmetic active, Ker represents the keratin protein, S represents sulfur, -SH represents the thiol and Pr represents the protecting group. Based on theory, the above thiol- protecting group bond is broken via some form of activation yielding the reactive unprotected thiol which would then be capable of forming a mixed disulfide with keratm disulfides via nucleophihc displacement. Such activation could be accomplished via hydrolysis or by the action of a nucleophile other than water, either m the substrate itself or in a separate composition Such hydrolysis or nucleophihc attack can itself be enhanced m several way such as by application of a source of energy or catalysis. This mixing may be done pπor to use or simultaneously, duπng application to the substrate. Where the mixing occurs simultaneously to application, the release of the protecting group occurs in-situ on the substrate.
Surpπsingly, it has been found that, alternatively, the formation of the covalent bonds may occur without mixing with a release agent. Direct reaction of certain protected thiol compounds with the hair occurs via the formation of a mixed disulfide with the existing disulfide bonds withm keratm as is illustrated below, reaction (g):
R-S— Pr + Ker-S— S— Ker -^ R-S— S-Ker + Ker- SH + Pr- OH fe) While not being bound to theory, it is believed that the keratin itself could be activating the thiol protecting group bond to enable the observed durable benefits. The resulting free protecting group may or may not undergo decomposition reactions. The byproducts of the activation of the sulfur-heterocychc bond will usually be removed from the substrate by washing.
The cosmetic agent, R, of the present invention may be monofunctionahzed, i.e. the cosmetic active moiety, R, carπes a single molecular "hook" connected to the cosmetic agent via a sulfur-sp3 carbon bond, or it may be bis- or multi- functionahzed, i.e. the cosmetic active, R, may carry two or more sp3 electrophiles connected to the cosmetic agent via separate sulfur-sp3 carbon bonds. The latter may be useful for example m achieving a greater degree of chemical bonding of the cosmetic agent to the substrate or for generating bonds between adjacent features of the substrate, e.g. producing a cross-lmkmg effect. The latter may be employed to improve the strength or tensile properties of keratmaceous fibers or for enhancing the degree of hair setting compared with pπor art hair methods. It is understood that within the scope of this invention, numerous potentially and actually tautomeπc compounds are involved. Thus, for example, 2-mercaptopyπdιne (I) exists under known conditions m the pyπdme-2-thιone tautomer form (II). It is to be understood that when this development refers to a particular structure, all of the reasonable additional tautomeπc structures are included. In the art, tautomeπc structures are frequently represented by one single structure and the present invention follows this general practice.
Figure imgf000008_0001
(I) (LT)
Preferred embodiments of the present invention are related to functional silicone compositions More specifically, these embodiments are related to functional silicone compositions which are used in the cosmetics industry.
Silicones are widely used in hair care products due to the conditioning benefit that they impart to hair. By modern day technology, the silicone is deposited on hair during the application process but is held only by weak physical forces, such as hydrogen bonding or van der Waals interactions. Because the forces are weak, the benefits of silicone by deposition are short lived. Beneficial conditioning effect can also be caused by treating hair with silanol capped ammo-functionahzed silicones. These can undergo condensation cure reactions on hair to form somewhat durable films. Generally, conditioning benefits are attributed to the deposition of high molecular weight, high viscosity fluids and gums which can weight down the hair.
It is widely known by those skilled in the art that covalent bonding is the key to "permanent" hair treatment. Processes which alter the structure of the hair, such as permanent wave and color treatment methods, do provide longer lasting effects. These processes include glycolate reduction and peroxide reoxidation. However, the processes are very damaging to hair and can only be earned out every eight to ten weeks.
Gough et al. in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,523,080 and 5,525,332 descnbe the synthesis of sihcone- azlactone polymers which exhibit covalent bonding and "permanent" conditioning benefit. Gough et al. discuss incorporating an azlactone-functionalized copolymer which consists of vmylazlactone and methacryloyl polydimethylsiloxane monomers into a sihcone-active group- hair structure. The hair treatment using the sihcone-azlactone polymers did not consist of the steps of reduction with a glycolate or reoxidation with peroxide.
New compositions are constantly being sought which impart improved hair care benefits without a harsh, damaging chemical treatment.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
This invention relates to a topical composition for treating ammo acid based substrates compnsing a protected thiol compound having the formula
R-<S— Pr)m where R is a mono or multivalent cosmetically active functional group, S is sulfur, and Pr is a protecting group, and m is an integer between 1 and 100. The invention further relates to systems which compπse this protected thiol compound and an activating mechanism. The protected thiol compounds of the present invention may be used in hair care compositions, textile care compositions, cosmetic compositions, oral care compositions, skin care, nail care, laundry care, acne care and animal care compositions
A preferred embodiment of the present invention provides a silicone composition and method for making. The composition compnses a polysiloxane or silicone resm, at least one linker, and at least one molecular hook.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to topical compositions which provide attachment of functional groups to ammo acid based substrates.
As used herein, "cystme containing, ammo acid based substrates" are proteinaceous mateπals which contain the amino acid cystine in its amino acid sequence. The phrase "amino acid sequence" refers to a specific configuration of the ammo acids comprising a protein. Cystine amino acid units are represented by Ker-S-S-Ker and cysteine amino acid units by Ker- SH. The compositions of the present invention can be used to attach functional groups to materials such as keratm, as found m human and animal hair, skm and nails; various animal body parts such as horns, hooves and feathers; and other naturally occurnng protein containing materials, such as wool.
The topical compositions of the present invention can compπse, consist of, or consist essentially of the essential elements and limitations of the invention descnbed herein, as well as any of the additional or optional ingredients, components, or limitations described herein.
All percentages, parts and ratios are by weight of the total composition, unless otherwise specified. All such weights as they pertain to listed ingredients are based on the specific ingredient level and, therefore, do not include solvents, earners, by-products, filler or other minor ingredients that may be included in commercially available matenals, unless otherwise specified.
PROTECTED THIOL COMPOUND
The compositions of the present invention compπse a protected thiol compound having the formula
R_<S— Pr)m where R is a mono or multivalent cosmetically active functional group, S is sulfur, Pr is a protecting group, and m is an integer ranging from about 1 to about 100, preferably from about 1 to about 50, more preferably equal to 1 to about 20, and most preferably equal to 1 to about 5.
Typically, the protected thiol compounds of the present invention are present m the compositions of the invention in an amount from about 0.000001% to about 30%, preferably from about 0 0001% to about 25%, more preferably from 0 01 to about 20%, even more preferably from about 0 1% to about 10%, and most preferably from about 1% to about 5%, by weight of the composition Suitable ranges of amounts will generally depend upon the functional group in question For example, hair conditioners that are modified with the molecular hooks' of the present invention will normally be present from about 0 01% to 10% by weight of the composition, and hair styling agents that are modified such as cationic conditioning polymers or polyisobutylene will normally be present from about 0 01 to 10% by weight of the composition, perfluoropolyether mateπals that are modified may be present from about 0 000001 to 0 1% by weight of the composition, hair dye chromophonc matenals may be present from 0 1% to 10% and other film forming polymers that are modified may be present from about 0 01 to 2% of the composition
The protected thiol compound compnses from about 1 to about 100, preferably from about 1 to about 50, more preferably from about 1 to 20, and most preferably equal from 1 to about 5 sulfur atoms, each linked to one protective group Protecting Group
The protected thiol compounds of the present invention compnse 1 to about 100, preferably 1 to 50, more preferably 1 to 20 and most preferably 1 to 5 protecting groups The protecting group may be selected from the range consisting of heterocyclic protecting groups, sp2 aliphatic trigonal carbon protecting groups, sp3 carbon protecting groups, metal based protecting groups, non-metal and metalloid based protecting groups, energy-sensitive protecting groups and mixtures thereof The protecting group is preferably selected from the range consisting of heterocyclic protecting groups, sp2 aliphatic tngonal carbon protecting groups, sp3 carbon protecting groups and non-metal protecting groups The protecting group is more preferably selected from heterocyclic protecting groups, sp2 aliphatic tngonal carbon protecting groups and non-metal protecting groups
Heterocyclic Protecting Groups - The cosmetic composition of the present invention comprises a protected thiol compound wherein the thiol protective group may be a heterocyclic nng or ring system Heterocyclic groups that are suitable for use m the present invention include mono- or polyunsaturated or saturated heterocyclic nngs, heterocyclic nng systems, fused heterocyclic ring systems, substituted heterocyclic nngs, substituted heterocyclic nng systems or substituted fused heterocyclic nng systems The heterocyclic nngs contain from about three to about thirty members, and may contain electronegative heteroatoms including N, O, S, or P The heterocyclic nngs or nng systems also may contain exocyclic double bonds of the C=M type wherein M is O, S, NA1 or CA'A2 A1 and A2 used here, and A3 and A4 used hereinafter, each represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or polycychc aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroahphatic or heteroolefmic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can incorporate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or perfluoro substitution.
Optional substituents on the heterocyclic nng or ring system, X1, X2, X3, X4 X5..., can be selected from electron withdrawing, electron neutral, or electron donating groups with Hammett sigma para values between -1.0 and +1.5 which can be non-ionic, zwitteriomc, cationic or anionic comprising for example C-lmked groups of the classes defined above as A1, A2, A3, and A4; S- hnked groups including SA1, SCN, SO2A\ SO3A1, SSA1, SOA1, SOzNA'A2, SNA1 A2, S(NA')A2, S(0)(NA')A2, SA' NA2), SONA'A2; 0-hnked groups including OA1, OOA1, OCN, ONA'A2; N- linked groups including NA'A2, NAΑ2A, NC, NA'OA2, NA'SA2, NCO, NCS, NO,, N=NA\ N=NOA', NA'CN, N=C=NA', NA'NA2A3, NA'NA2NA3A4, NAlN=NA2; other miscellaneous groups including COHal, CON3, CONA1,, CONA'COA2, C(=NA')NA'A2, CHO, CHS, CN, NC, Hal, and deπved groups that connect one or more of X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 via a nng system;
Ak is A1, A2, A3, and A4 or X1, X2, X3, X4 X5...
Hal is F, Cl, Br, or I.
H is hydrogen, O is oxygen, N is nitrogen, C is carbon, S is sulfur, Cl is chlonne, Br is bromine, I is iodine, F is fluonne, R is any cosmetically active, functional group or benefit agent as descnbed herein below.
The invention includes the following preferred non-hmitmg heterocyclic exemplary classes and their X1, X2, X3, X4, X5... substituted denvatives [Herein referred to as Class I]: - Six membered heterocycles with a single heteroatom such as pyπdme:
Figure imgf000012_0001
- Six membered heterocycles with two heteroatoms such as pynmidmes, pyrazmes and pyπdazmes:
Figure imgf000012_0002
Six membered heterocycles with three and four heteroatoms such as tπazines and tetrazmes:
Figure imgf000013_0001
- Six membered O, N, and/or S containing heterocycles with C=0, C=S or C=C exocyclic groups:
Figure imgf000013_0002
X = O, S, or NX
- Cationic six membered heterocycles with one heteroatom such as pyridinium, pyryhum, and fhiopyryhum salt deπvatives:
Figure imgf000013_0003
- Cationic six membered heterocychcs with two heteroatoms such as pyπmidimum and pyrazmium salt denvatives:
Figure imgf000013_0004
- Five membered heterocycles with one heteroatom such as furans, pyrroles, and thiophenes:
Figure imgf000013_0005
- Five membered heterocycles with two heteroatoms such as pyrazoles, isoxazoles, and isothiazoles:
Figure imgf000013_0006
- Five membered heterocychcs with three heteroatoms such as 1,2,4-tπazoles, 1,2,3-tπazoles, 1,2,4-oxadιazoles, and 1,2,4-thιadιazoles
Figure imgf000014_0001
- Five membered cationic heterocycles with two or more heteroatoms such as pyrazohum and tπazolium:
Figure imgf000014_0002
- Seven membered heterocycles such as azepines, oxepins and thiepms:
Figure imgf000014_0003
Seven membered cationic heterocycles such as thiepimum salts:
Figure imgf000014_0004
and related vaπations including combinations of the above heterocycles m a nng system and fused systems both of which may include carbocyclic nngs without heteroatoms. The cationic heterocycles will also incorporate a Cl", Br", I" or other suitable negatively charged counteπon.
The invention may also include heterocyclic compounds compnsing the cosmetic active, R, that are capable of generating a thiol via a πng-openmg mechanism. Such compounds are represented by the following structures:
Figure imgf000014_0005
Figure imgf000015_0001
wherein at least one cosmetic group, R, comprises or is attached to any of the X1, X2, X3 groups.
Q1 and Q2 represent, independently from one another, a divalent group comparable to A1 but with the open valencies separated by 0 to 4 atoms.
W1 represents an electron withdrawing group with a Hammett sigma para value more positive than 0.10 comprising C-linked groups of the classes defined above as A1, A2, A3; S- linked groups including SA1, SCN, S02A\ SO3A1, SSA1, SOA1, SONA'A2, S02NAΑ2, SNA1 A2, S(NA')A2, S(0)(NA1)A2, SA'(NA2); O-linked groups including OA1, OOA1, OCN, ONA'A2; N- hnked groups including NA!A2, NA A3*, NC, NA'OA2, NA'SA2, NCO, NCS, N02, N=NA\ N=NOA1, NA'CN, N=C=NA', NA'NA2A3, NA'NA2NA3A4, NA:N=NA2; other miscellaneous groups including COHal, CON3, CONA'2. CONA'COA2, C(=NA')NA'A2, CHO, CHS, CN, NC,
Hal, and denved groups that connect one or more of X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 via a ring system; L1 is a suitable leaving group including but not limited to SA1, OA1, or NA'A2 Below are some non-hmitmg representative examples for each of the above heterocyclic structures (LI through XV) that are capable of generating a thiol via a πng-openmg mechanism
A thiolactone, thiophthahde, and thiazohdinone (classes II, HI and IV),
Figure imgf000016_0001
A dihydrothiophene, dihydrothiopyran, and dιhydro-l,4-thιazιne (classes V, VI and VII),
Figure imgf000016_0002
Unsaturated thiolactones and a dihydrothiapyrone (classes VIII, LX and X),
Figure imgf000016_0003
A dihydrothiepm, thiopyran and thiepmone (classes XI, XII and XIU),
Figure imgf000016_0004
A dihydrothiazolme and 2-methoxythιazolιdme (classes XIV and XV),
Figure imgf000016_0005
and other related denvatives.
Preferred protected thiol compounds of the heterocyclic thiol protective type include the following non-hmitmg examples:
Figure imgf000017_0001
Figure imgf000017_0002
Figure imgf000017_0003
Figure imgf000017_0004
Figure imgf000017_0005
Figure imgf000018_0001
Figure imgf000018_0002
Figure imgf000018_0003
Figure imgf000018_0004
Figure imgf000018_0005
Figure imgf000019_0001
Figure imgf000019_0002
and mixtures thereof, wherein Hal" is Cl", Br", I" or any suitable negatively charged counteπon.
sp2 Aliphatic Trigonal Carbon Protecting Groups - The protecting groups of the present invention may comprise a sp2 carbon moiety wherein the divalent sulfur atom is bonded on one side to the cosmetic active and on the other side to a sp" carbon atom. Protecting groups of the sp2 aliphatic trigonal carbon type that are suitable for the present invention include (a) aliphatic trigonal carbon atoms double bonded to O, S, N, or C,
M1
R- -X1 which includes deπvatives of the following acids: thiocarboxyhc (R-S-C(0)CH2-A"), carbonodithioic (R-S-C(O)S-A1, R-S-C(S)O-A'), carbonothioic (R-S-C(O)O-A1), carbamothioic (R-S-C(0)N-A1A2), dithiocarboxyhc (R-S-C(S)CH2-A'), carbonotnthioic (R-S-C(S)S-A1), carbamoditmoic (R-S-C(S)N-AΑ2), carboximidotmoic
Figure imgf000019_0003
carbommidodithioic (R-S-C(NA')S-A1), and carbommidothioic (R-S-C(NA')O-A1) acids Suitable sp2 aliphatic tngonal carbon type protecting groups for use in the topical compositions of the present invention do not include carbamimidothioic acids.
The invention also includes (b) related sp2 carbon derivatives that are capable of releasing a cosmetic thiol via an intramolecular nucleophihc attack and release mechanism, M1
M1
C-
R- C- -Q1 — Nu R- +
Nu— Q1 (c) sp2 carbon derivatives that are capable of rearranging to produce a cosmetic containing thiol via an intramolecular nucleophihc attack and rearrangement mechanism,
M1 M1
R- -E1 — C- -S Q1 -Nu R- -E' — C Nu— Q1 — S" as well as (d) tngonal carbon electrophiles of the anhydπde, thioanhydπde, and secondary/tertiary amide type,
M1 Mz
R- -C- -X1 and related aliphatic tngonal carbon vaπations. The cationic protecting groups will also incorporate a Cl", Br", I" or other suitable negatively charged counteπon.
M1, M2 are O, S, NA1, NOA1, NA]A2+, CA^CAV, SA+, OA+.
E1 is O, S, NA1, CAW.
Nu is NHA'A2*, NA'A2, OHA1+, OA1.
X1 represents an electron withdrawing or electron donating group with a Hammett sigma para value between -1.0 and +1.5 which can be non-ionic, zwittenonic, cationic or anionic compnsing for example C-lmked groups of the classes defined below as A1, A2, A3, S-hnked groups including SA1, SCN, S02A\ S03A', SSA1, SOA1, SONA'A2, S02NAΑ2, SNA^2, S(NA')A2, S^^A^A2, SA'(NA2); 0-lιnked groups including OA1, OOA1, OCN, ONA'A2; N- hnked groups including NA'A2, NA1A2A3+, NC, NA'OA2, NA[SA2, NCO, NCS, N02, N=NA', N=NOA', NA'CN, N=C=NA\ NA[NA2A3, NA'NA2NA3A4, NA'N=NA2; other miscellaneous groups including COHal, CON3, CONA1,, CONA'COA2, C(=NA1)NAΑ2, CHO, CHS, CN, NC, Hal, and denved groups that connect one or more of X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 via a nng system;
A1, A2 represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cychc aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can incorporate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or per fluoro substitution. Q is a divalent group comparable to A1 but with the open valencies separated by 2 to 7 atoms.
Figure imgf000021_0001
Y1 represents electron an withdrawing substituent with a Hammett sigma para value more positive than 0.10. Such electron withdrawing substituents which can be nonionic, zwitteriomc, cationic or anionic include the following non-hmitmg examples: N02, CN, COOA1, CONA'A2, C(O)A', S02A', S02OA', NO, COHal, CON3, CONA'A2, CONA'COA2, C(=NA')NA2A3, C(S)A', NC, SCN, S02A', S03A', SOA1, S02NAΑ2, SNA'A2, S(NA*)A2, S(0)(NA!)A2, NA[A2A, SA]A2+.
H is hydrogen, O is oxygen, N is nitrogen, C is carbon, S is sulfur, Cl is chlorine, Br is bromine, I is iodine, F is fluorine, R is any cosmetically active functional group or benefit agent as descnbed herein below.
Non-hmitmg examples of suitable X1 groups are as follows:
Figure imgf000021_0002
Figure imgf000021_0003
Figure imgf000021_0004
Figure imgf000021_0005
Figure imgf000021_0006
Figure imgf000022_0001
^N
N
+ .CH3
/^N
— N
or related derivatives.
Preferred protected thiol compounds of the sp2 carbon thiol protective type include the following non-limiting examples:
N(CH3)2 + Br"
R- OCH2CH3
R S- C OCH2CH3
Figure imgf000022_0002
Figure imgf000022_0003
Figure imgf000023_0001
Figure imgf000023_0002
Figure imgf000023_0003
Figure imgf000023_0004
Figure imgf000023_0005
Figure imgf000023_0006
O
R- CHj CH, CH, CH, NH3 + Cl*
O
R- -CH, CH, CH, -NH + Cl"
O
R- -CH, CH2 CH2 CH2 NH3 + Cl"
Figure imgf000024_0001
sp3 Carbon Protecting Groups The protecting groups of the present invention may comprise an sp3 carbon moiety wherein the divalent sulfur atom is bonded on one side to the cosmetic active and on the other side to a sp3 carbon atom. Protecting groups of the sp3 carbon type that are suitable for the present invention include those of the thioether type,
X1 1 2 R-S— C-X
X (I) including the monothioacetal (II. X1 = H), monothioketal (II. X1, X2 = H), monothioortho ester (LU) and monothioorthocarbonate (IV) type,
X' OA1 OA* 1 2 I , 1 2
R— S— C- X R— S— C-X R— S— C-OA** 1 3
OA1 (U) O ^AΛ*- (HI) OAΥ3 (IV) the dιthιoacetal(V. X1 = H), dithioketal (V. X1, X2 = H), dithioorthoester (VI) and dithioorthocarbonate (VII) type,
X' OA1 OA1 1 2 I j 1 2 R— S— C- X2 R— S— C- X R-S- C-OA2
SA1 AJ
(V) SA S
(VI) (VII) the tnthioorthoester type (VLII),
SA1
I R-S— C-OA*-
SAA3 (vm) the thiohemiammal (LX), monothioorthoamide (X) and dithioorthoamide (XI) type, X1 OA3 SA3
R— S— C 1 -X 2 R— S— C ' -X 22 R— S— C ' -X I1
NA'A2^ A'A2 (X) NA'A2^ and related classes wherein X1, X2, X3 represent, independently from one another, electron withdrawing, electron neutral, or electron donating groups with Hammett sigma para values between -1.0 and +1 5 which can be non-iomc, zwitteriomc, cationic or anionic compnsmg for example C-lmked groups of the classes defined below as A1, A2, A3, S-hnked groups including SA1, SCN, SO2A\ SO3A1, SSA1, SOA1, SON^A2, S02NA'A2, SNA'A2, S(NA')A2, S(0)(NA')A2, SA'(NA2); O-lmked groups including OA1, OOA1, OCN, ONA^2, N-lmked groups including NA'A2, NAΑ2A3", NC, NA'OA2, NA'SA2, NCO, NCS, N02, N=NA', N=NOA\ NA'CN, N=C=NA1, NA'NA2A3, NA'NA2NA3A4, NA:N=NA2, other miscellaneous groups including COHal, CON3, CONA'2, CONA'COA2, C(=NA')NA'A2, CHO, CHS, CN, NC, Hal, and denved groups that connect one or more of X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 via a nng system. Hal is F, Cl, Br, or I.
For the thioether class, as defined above, at least one of X1, X2, or X3 groups is electron donating such that the sum of the Hammett sigma para values for X1, X2, X3 is negative for this class.
A1, A2, A3, A4 represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cyclic aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can incorporate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or per fluoro substitution.
H is hydrogen, O is oxygen, N is nitrogen, C is carbon, S is sulfur, Cl is chlorine, Br is bromine, I is iodine, F is fluonne, R is any cosmetic active, functional group or benefit agent as descnbed herein below.
Preferred electron donating substituents for X1, X2, X3 are aromatic or heteroaromatic denvatives which include the following non-hmitmg examples:
Figure imgf000026_0001
Figure imgf000026_0002
Figure imgf000026_0003
Figure imgf000026_0004
O.
- .
Figure imgf000026_0005
plus other related derivatives.
Preferred protected thiol compounds chosen from classes I through XI above include the following non-limiting examples:
Figure imgf000027_0001
Figure imgf000027_0002
Figure imgf000027_0003
Figure imgf000028_0001
Figure imgf000028_0002
Figure imgf000028_0003
The present invention also includes organosulfur molecular "hooks" wherein the potential cosmetic thiol is bonded directly to an sp3 carbon atom that is part of a group capable of undergoing heterolytic β-elimination, the reversal of Michael Addition reactions, to liberate a thiol. Suitable sp3 carbon groups capable of undergoing heterolytic β-elimination are represented in the compounds,
H
,γ-
R- CH, — C- -Y1 R- -S' + H C" C
\
Y^
Y (V) H y
/
R- CH, — C- -Y1 R- + n H2,C* = C
A'
A1 (VI)
wherein Y1 and Y2 represent, independently from one another, electron withdrawing substituents with a combined Hammett sigma para value more positive than 0 10. Such electron withdrawing substituents include the following non-hmitmg examples: N02, CN, COOA1, CONA'A", C(0)A', S02A\ SO2OA\ NO, COHal, CON3, CONA'A2, CONA'COA2, C(=NA')NA2A3, C(S)A\ NC, SCN, S02A', S03A\ SOA1, SONA'A2, S02NAΑ2, SNA'A2, S(NA')A2, S(0)(NA')A2, NA1 A2A3+, SA'A2" and aromatic and heteroaromatic denvatives.
Some non-hmitmg examples of aromatic and heteroaromatic electron withdrawing groups for Y1 and Y2 include the following:
Figure imgf000029_0001
Figure imgf000029_0002
Figure imgf000029_0003
Figure imgf000029_0004
Figure imgf000029_0005
plus other related denvatives. Prefeπed hook compounds that are capable of undergoing heterolytic β-ehmination, the reversal of Michael Addition reactions, to liberate a thiol include the following non-hmiting examples
O
R- 'CH2 CH " -CH
O
Figure imgf000030_0001
O
H
R- -CH, -OCH,
OCH,
O
H
R- -CH, -NH,
:0
NH2
The present invention also includes cases wherein the cosmetic thiol is protected by being bonded directly to an sp3 carbon atom that is incoφorated withm a ring structure. Suitable sp carbon ring systems are represented by the following,
Figure imgf000031_0001
wherein Z is O, NAk, S, (CH2)0.2 or
Figure imgf000031_0002
L1 is A1 or part of a 5 to 7 membered fused nng system. The above ring system(s) can carry any substituents. Specific examples of sp3 carbon ring compounds covered by the present invention include the following non-hmiting examples:
Figure imgf000031_0003
Figure imgf000031_0004
Figure imgf000031_0005
Figure imgf000032_0001
Figure imgf000032_0002
and other related derivatives.
A1, A2, A3, represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cychc aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can mcoφorate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or per fluoro substitution.
H is hydrogen, O is oxygen, N is nitrogen, C is carbon, S is sulfur, Cl is chlorine, Br is bromine, I is iodine, F is fluonne, R is any cosmetically active functional group or benefit agent as descnbed herein below.
Metal Based Protecting Groups - The molecular "hooks" of the present invention compnse a divalent sulfur atom that is bonded on one side to the cosmetic active and on the other side to an alkaline earth metal, transition metal or a representative metal in groups ILA, LTJA, IV A, VA, VIA, VILA, Vm, LB, LLB, ΠLB, ΓVB, VB, VLB, and VLLB of the peπodic table of the elements including Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, La, Ti, Zr, V, Cr, Mo, W, Mn, Fe, Co, Rh, Ni, Pd, Pt, Cu, Ag, Au, Zn, In, Sn, and Bi. Protected thiol compounds compnsing such heavy metal mercaptides are represented by the following:
R S Met Xn or Mn
R- Met- wherem Met is an alkaline earth metal, transition metal or a representative metal in groups I A, ILIA, LVA, VA, VIA, VILA, Vffl. LB, ILB, LLLB, LVB, VB, VLB, and VILB of the periodic table of the elements including Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, La, Ti, Zr, V, Cr, Mo, W, Mn, Fe, Co, Rh, Ni, Pd, Pt, Cu, Ag, Au, Zn, In, Sn, and Bi. Also, wherein n and m are zero or integers such that 1 + 2m + n equals the valency of Met.
X represents independent electron withdrawing, electron neutral or electron donating groups with Hammett sigma para values between -1 0 and +1.5 which can be non-iomc, zwittenomc. cationic or anionic comprising for example C-lmked groups of the classes defined below as A1, A2, A3; S-lmked groups including SA1, SCN, S02A', S03A', SSA1, SOA1, SONA'A2, S02NA'A2, SNA'A2, S(NA')A2, S(0)(NA')A2, SA'(NA2); O-lmked groups including OA1, OOA1, OCN, ONA'A2; N-lmked groups including NA'A2, NAΑ2A3+, NC, NA'OA2, NA'SA2, NCO, NCS, N02, N=NA', N=NOA[, NA'CN, N=C=NA', NA'NA2A\ NA'NA2NA3A4, NA'N=NA2, other miscellaneous groups including COHal, CON3, CONA'2, CONA'COA2, C(=NA1)NA'A2, CHO, CHS, CN, NC, Hal, and denved groups that connect one or more of X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 via a nng system. Hal is F, Cl, Br, or I.
A1, A2, A3, A4 represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cyclic aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can mcoφorate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or per fluoro substitution.
M is a divalent group such as O, S, NA1 or CA'A2.
H is hydrogen, O is oxygen, N is nitrogen, C is carbon, S is sulfur, Cl is chlorine, Br is bromine, I is iodine, F is fluonne, B is boron, Al is aluminum, Si is silicon, N is nitrogen, Mg is magnesium, Ca is calcium, Sr is strontium, Ba is banum, La is lanthanum, Ti is titanium, Zr is zirconium, V is vanadium, Cr is chromium, Mo is molybdenum, W is tungsten, Mn is manganese, Fe is iron, Co is cobalt, Rh is rhodium, Ni is nickel, Pd is palladium, Pt is platinum, Cu is copper, Ag is silver, Au is gold, Zn is zinc, In is mdium, Sn is tin, Bi is bismuth, and R is any cosmetic active, functional group or benefit agent as descnbed herein below. Also wherein at least one substituent, X, or the cosmetic active, R, contains salt forming or water solubilizmg groups including, but not limited to, COO", S03 , NH3 +, OH, COOA1, (CH2CH2O)nA\ CONA'A2, OS03 ", OP03H\ NA!A2A3^, and the like.
Preferred metal based proiectmg groups of the present invention include, but are not limited to, the following examples,
N(CH3)2 R-S— Ti-N(CH3)2 N(CH3)2
O
I I
R— S- V-S— R
I
S-R
CH2CH3 R-S— Sn-CH2CH3 CH2CH3
OCH2CH2CH2CH3
R-S— Ti-OCH2CH2CH2CH3 OCH2CH2CH2CH3
R— S-Ni-S— R
S-R I R-S-Mo-S— R
I
S— R , and
OCH2CH2CH2CH3 R— S— &-OCH2CH2CH2CH3 OCH2CH2CH2CH3 Non-metal and metalloid based Protecting Groups - The molecular "hooks" of the present invention compnse a divalent sulfur atom that is bonded on one side to the cosmetic active and on the other side to a representative non-metal or metalloid atom including boron, aluminum, silicon, germanium, nitrogen, phosphorus, sulfur, selenium, antimony, and tellurium. Molecular "hooks" whereby a divalent sulfur atom of a potential cosmetic thiol is bonded directly to these representative non-metals and metalloids are represented by the following
R S E Xn or m
R S E Xn wherein E is a representative non-metal or metalloid element including B, Al, Si, Ge, N, P, S, Se, Sb, and Te. Also, wherein n and m are zero or integers such that 1 + 2m + n equals the valency of E.
X represents independent electron withdrawing, electron neutral or electron donating groups with Hammett sigma para values between -1.0 and +1.5 which can be non-iomc, zwittenomc, cationic or anionic compnsmg for example C-lmked groups of the classes defined below as A1, A2, A3; S-lmked groups including SA1, SCN, S02A', S03A', SSA1, SOA1, SONA'A2, S02NA'A2, SNA' A2, S^A^A2, S(0)(NA')A2, SA'(NA2); O-linked groups including OA1, OOA', OCN, ONA'A2; N-lmked groups including NA'A2, NA^A3*, NC, NA'OA2, NA'SA2, NCO, NCS, N02, N=NA', N=NOA\ NA'CN, NONA1, NA'NA2A3, NA'NA2NA3A4, NA'N=NA2; other miscellaneous groups including COHal, CON3, CONA'2, CONA'COA2, C(=NA')NA'A2, CHO, CHS, CN, NC, Hal, and denved groups that connect one or more of X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 via a nng system. Hal is F, Cl, Br, or I.
M is a divalent group such as O, S, NA1 or CA'A2.
A1, A2, A3, A4 represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cyclic aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can mcoφorate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or per fluoro substitution.
H is hydrogen, O is oxygen, N is nitrogen, C is carbon, S is sulfur, Cl is chlonne, Br is bromine, I is iodine, F is fluonne, B is boron, Al is aluminum, Si is silicon, Ge is germanium, N is nitrogen, P is phosphorus, Te is telluπum, and R is any cosmetic active, functional group or benefit agent as described herein below.
Preferred thiol protective systems utilizing non-metals and metalloids of the present invention include, but are not limited to, the following examples,
OCH2CH3 R-S— Si-OCH2CH3 OCH2CH3
CH3
I R— S— Si-CH.3 I CH3
O
II R— S— S— CH3 II O
R— S— B— S— R I S- R
O O
II
R-S-Ge-O-Ge-S— R , and
S-R I R-S— Sb-S- R I S-R
Energy-sensitive Protecting Groups - The topical compositions of the present invention may also compnse a protected thiol compound wherein the protecting group is energy-sensitive. Protected thiol compounds comprising energy-sensitive protecting groups are chemically stable in solution. Such potential thiols are protected until a suitable source of energy is applied to the composition. Upon application of a suitable energy source, the energy-sensitive protecting groups become labile, thereby releasing the reactive thiol Typically, the energy source will be light. Once the thiols are released, they are capable of reacting with amino acid residues present in keratmaceous substrates to enable durable cosmetic benefits.
As mentioned above, the protected thiols are activated by applying a suitable energy source to the composition, i.e., irradiation, which converts the photoactivatable protected thiol compounds to fully reactive thiol compounds. The byproducts of the energy activation of the protecting group will usually be removed from the substrate by washing.
Many different energy-sensitive groups can be employed for protecting thiols used in the topical compositions of the present invention. Typically, the thiol groups are protected with a photoactivatable protecting group that is capable of liberating or releasing the reactive thiol by irradiation The properties and uses of photoreactive compounds have been reviewed. See McCray et al, 1989, Ann. Rev Biophys Chem 18:239-270, which is incoφorated herein by reference. The photosensitive groups will preferably be activatable by low energy ultraviolet or visible light. Many, although not all, of the energy-sensitive protecting groups are aromatic compounds. Suitable photoremovable protecting groups are also descnbed in, for example, Patchomik, 1970, J Am. Chem. Soc 92:6333, and Amit et al, 1974, / Org Chem 39: 192, which are mcoφorated herein by reference. More preferably, the energy-sensitive protecting group will be a nitrobenzyhc compound, such as o-nitrobenzyl or benzylsulfonyl groups. Suitable examples include 6-nitroveratryloxycarbonyl (NVOC); 6-mtropιperonyloxycarbonyl (NPOC); alpha, alpha-dimethyldimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl (DDZ), methyl 6-nιtroveratryloxycarbonyl (MenVOC), methyl-6-mtropιperonyloxycarbonyl (MeNPOC), or 1-pyrenylmethyl. The energy- sensitive protecting group may also be of the silyl type as descnbed m Pirrung and Lee, 1993, J Org Chem. 58:6961-6963 and Pirrung and U.S. Patent Number 5,486,633, issued to Lee, both incoφorated by reference herein. Suitable examples include (hydroxystyryl)dιmethylsιlyl (HSDMS) and (hydroxystyryl)dusopropylsιlyl (HSDIS).
Clearly, many energy-sensitive protecting groups are suitable for use in the present method. Some examples of acceptable energy-sensitive protecting groups are presented in Table 1, below, together with their corresponding wavelengths for deprotection.
TABLE 1 Energy-sensitive Protecting Groups
Deprotection Group Wavelength
6-nιtroveratryloxycarbonyl (NVOC) UV (300-350 nm) dimethyldimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl (DDZ) UV (280-300 nm) mtrobenzyloxycarbonyl (NBOC) UV (300-350 nm) 5-bromo-7-nιtromdohnyl (BNI) UV (420 nm) O-hydroxy-alpha-methyl-cinnamoyl (HMC) UV (300-350 nm) 2-oxymethylene anthraquinone (OMA) UV (350 nm)
The composition containing the cosmetic active protected with the energy-sensitive group may be activated with energy both pπor or during usage. For instance, the energy source may be applied to the composition for a sufficient time penod to activate the energy sensitive protecting group either before, duπng or after the composition is applied to the substrate. The energy source may include vanous types of electromagnetic radiation including ultraviolet, visible, near infrared, infrared, far infrared or microwave. In a preferred embodiment, the radiation is UV, near LR or visible light.
Examples of suitable protecting groups that are capable of undergoing photochemical or thermal thiol deprotection include, but are not limited to, the following:
I 2-Nιtrobenzyl derivatives
Figure imgf000038_0001
Examples:
Figure imgf000038_0002
Figure imgf000038_0003
LL 2-Nιtrobenzyloxycarbonyl Denvatives
Figure imgf000039_0001
Examples:
Figure imgf000039_0002
Figure imgf000039_0003
Figure imgf000039_0004
LLI. Benzyloxycarbonyl Derivatives -SH + Side products
Figure imgf000040_0001
Examples:
Figure imgf000040_0002
IV. α.α-Dimethylbenzyloxycarbonyl Derivatives
Figure imgf000040_0003
Example:
Figure imgf000040_0004
V. 3 -Nitrophenyloxycarbonyl Derivatives
Figure imgf000040_0005
Example:
Figure imgf000041_0001
VI Phenacyl Derivatives
Figure imgf000041_0002
Examples:
Figure imgf000041_0003
VIL tert-Butyloxycarbonyl Denvatives
CH3 O
I II heat CH3— C-O-C-S- R ► R-SH + CO2 + CH3-C=CH2
I l I
CH3 CH3
X1, X2, X3, X4 , and X5 can be selected from electron withdrawing, electron neutral, or electron donatmg groups with Hammett sigma para values between -1.0 and +1.5 which can be non-ionic, zwitteπomc, cationic or anionic compnsing for example C-lmked groups of the classes defined below as A1, A2, A3; S-lmked groups including SA1, SCN, S02A', SO3A\ SSA1, SOA1, SONAV, SOJNA'A2, SNA1 A2, S(NA')A2, S(0)(NA')A2, SA'(NA2); O-lmked groups including OA1, OOA1, OCN, ONA'A2; N-hnked groups including NA'A2, NAΑ2A3+, NC, NA'OA2, NA'SA2, NCO, NCS, N02, N=NA', N=NOA', NA'CN, NONA1, NA'NA2A3, NA'NA2NA3A4, NA'N=NA2; other miscellaneous groups including COHal, CON3, CONA'2, CONA'COA2, C(=NA')NA'A2, CHO, CHS, CN, NC, Hal, and deπved groups that connect one or more of X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 via a nng system;
A1, A2 represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cyclic aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can incoφorate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or per fluoro substitution Mono or Multivalent Cosmetically Active Functional Group
The mono or multivalent cosmetically active functional, R, suitable for inclusion in the present invention may be any compound that imparts one or more visual, tactile or other cosmetic beneficial effects on proteinaceous matenals such as keratin, i.e., hair, animal fur or wool. Any cosmetic compound may be included as a functional group in the compositions of the present invention as long as the compound can be modified to contain at least one divalent sulfur atom linked to a suitable protecting group as descnbed herein.
Suitable functional groups that can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to antimicrobial compounds, UV-absorbmg compounds, skin conditioning agents, hair conditioning agents, hair repair agents, hair styling agents, hair dyes, scalp treatment agents, anti- inflammatory compounds, antioxidants, dyes and colonng agents, perfumes, oral care actives, skm moistunzers, pharmaceutical agents, antidandruff agents, insect repellents, moistunzers, humectants, pearlescent and/or opacifying mateπals, fabπc care actives, pet grooming actives, fabric anti-wπnklmg agents, shπnk-resistant actives, laundry care actives, hard surfaces actives, textile actives, textile dyes, water-proofing agents, cationic polymers, cationic surface modifiers, hydrophobic surface modifiers, anionic surface modifiers, absorbents, antifungal agents, msecticidal agents, textile color guards, nail actives such as enamel and polish, eyelash actives and mascara, antiperspirant and deodorant actives, anti-acne actives, odor control actives, fluorescent actives, bleaching agents, enzymes, antibodies, dispersing aids, emollients, stabilizers, anti-static agents, anti-seborrhea agents, optical bπghteners, fluorescent dyes, softeners, cross-linking agents, photobleaches, bactencides, and mixtures thereof.
Examples of suitable antimicrobials which can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to denvatives of phenol, cresol, hydroxybenzoates, Tnclosan®, Tπcarban®, chlorhexidme, metal salts (e.g. zmc citrate, sodium zmc citrate, zinc pyndmethione, and stannous pyrophosphate) sangumaπne extract, metromdazole, quaternary ammonium compounds (chlorhexidme digluconate, hexetidione, octenidme, alexidme), halogenated bisphenohc compounds such as 2,2'-methylenebιs-(4-chloro-6-bromophenol), and salicylanihde.
Examples of suitable UV-absorbmg matenals which can be protected as thiol derivatives include but are not limited to denvatives of benzoates, oxybenzones, cmnamic acid, PARSOL MCX esters, benzotnazoles, and benzophenones. Examples of suitable skm conditioners or moisturizers which can be protected as thiol denvatives. include but are not limited to derivatives of alpha-hydroxy acids, polyols, hyaluronic acid, petrolatum, vegetable oils, esters of fatty acids, and mineral oil Such skin conditioners or moisturizers are bound to the velus hairs present on the skin, and not the skm directly, to achieve the long lasting skin benefits.
Examples of suitable anti-inflammatory agents which can be protected as thiol derivatives include but are not limited to corticosteroids or sahcylates.
Examples of suitable antioxidants which can be protected as thiol derivatives include but are not limited to ascorbates and gallates.
Examples of suitable hair conditioners which can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to mtact or modified proteins, such as hydrolyzed keratm, collagen, elastin, hemoglobin, silk, rice, soy, wheat protein, corn, fibronectin, reticulum, serum protein, wheat gluten, peptides and peptide denvatives; amino acids; hydroxylated fats; glycinates; silicone polymers, such as siloxane gums and resins, volatile or non-volatile silicone oils, ammo- (or other) functional silicones, and other sihcone-contammg polymers; hydrocarbon based conditioners including C8-C30 alkyl, alkenyl, modified alkyl or modified alkenyl, branched alkyl and branched alkenyl groups as well as long chain alkyl groups that are ethoxylated or substituted with vanous non-ionic, cationic or anionic functional groups including quats, ammes, amides, esters, hydroxyls, carboxylates, and the like, polysacchaπdes or monosacchandes, and alkyl cationic conditioning polymers such as cationic denvatives of guar gum and cellulose ether denvatives; poly(ethyleneoxιdes) and alkyl capped poly(ethyleneoxιdes) of molecular weights ranging from 100 to 10,000,000; and herb or other plant extracts, essential oils etc.
Examples of suitable hair styling agents which can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to film-forming polymers such as polyvinylpyrrohdone/vmyl acetate copolymer; styling copolymers compnsing silicone macromonomers, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,618,524 and 5,658,557, cationic polymers, such as those disclosed in GB-A-2161172 (Beecham), GB-A- 2122214 (Unilever) and GB-A-2050166 (L'Oreal); and hydrocarbon polymers, such as polyisobutylene; perfluoro-aliphatic and perfiuoro-aromatic compounds.
Examples of suitable dyes and colonng agents which can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to phenol, naphthols, acid dyes, azo denvatives; vegetable dyes, metallized dyes, nitrobenzene dyes, qumone-imme dyes, basic dyes, quaternary dyes, and oxidation dyes.
Examples of suitable fragrances that can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to phenols such as menthyl salicylate, thymol, and vanillin. Examples of suitable cationic polymers that can be protected as thiol derivatives include but are not limited to denvatives of quaternary ammonium salts of hydroxyethylcellulose, cationic copolymers of acrylic acid and acrylamide, cationic guar polymers, copolymers of vinylimidazohum methochloπde and vinylpyrrohdone, polyethylemmines, and other cationic polymers and resms known to those skilled m the art.
Examples of suitable oral care active agents that can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to anti-canes agents such as amine fluorides, monosodium fluorophosphate, casem; plaque buffers such as urea, calcium lactate, calcium glycerophosphate; anti-plaque agents, agents for alleviating sensitive teeth, e.g. potassium and strontium salts, particularly those of carboxylic acids; matenals that form films and block pores, oral pharmaceutical actives, (e.g. ibuprofen, flurbiprofen, aspiπn and indomethacin), biomolecules such as peptides, antibodies and enzymes; anti-tartar agents; agents for treating bad breath such as zmc salts; and anti-calculus agents (e.g. alkali metal pyrophosphates, hypophosphite- contaming polymers, organic phosphonates, and phosphocitrates).
Examples of suitable pharmaceutical agents that can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to medicinal agents, metabolic agents and other therapeutic agents of benefit in treating the human body.
Examples of antidandruff agents that can be protected as thiol denvatives include but are not limited to zinc pyndmethione, Octopirox®, chmbazole and ltroconazole.
An example of odor control actives that can be protected as thiol denvatives include the class of cyclodextnns. In addition to trapping odors on the substrate, the cyclodextnns can plausibly be utilized to deliver cosmetic actives molecules to the substrate such as perfumes that can be liberated slowly.
Other non-hmiting classes of beneficial cosmetic actives include sealants, binders, resms, adhesives, waxes, drying oils, varnishes, and latex finishes which compπse urethanes, polysulfides, acrylics, butyl polymers, maleated oils, cellulosics, starches etc.
The mono or multivalent cosmetically active functional preferably used in the present compositions is dependent on the product form desired. Hair care compositions preferably use hair conditioners, hair styling agents, dyes and colonng agents, sunscreens, fragrances, antidandruff agents, or mixtures thereof as the functional group. Preferable functional groups in textile care compositions include dyes and colonng agents, odor control actives, sealants, fragrances, and mixtures thereof. Cosmetic compositions preferably compnse dyes and colonng agents, sealants, resms, varnishes, latex finishes, and mixtures thereof. Oral care compositions preferably compπse anti-canes agents, plaque buffers, anti-plaque agents, agents for alleviating sensitive teeth, mateπals that form films and block pores, oral pharmaceutical actives, biomolecules, anti-tartar agents, agents for treating bad breath, anti-calculus agents, and mixtures thereof as functional groups. Pharmaceutical composition preferably select mono or multivalent cosmetically active functional groups from the group consisting of medicinal agents, metabolic agents, therapeutic agents, anti-inflammatory compounds, and mixtures thereof Animal care composition preferably compnse antimicrobial agents, insect repellents, grooming actives, and mixtures thereof as functional groups. OPTIONAL ACTIVATING MECHANISMS
As explained above, the molecular 'hooks' of the present invention may be activated via a number of mechanisms either before, dunng or after the application of the topical compositions containing the protected thiol to the substrate. Vanous embodiments of the present invention are systems which compπse both the topical composition herein with an activating mechanism.
Such activation could be achieved via hydrolysis by the use of a mechanism to manipulate the pH of the environment surrounding the compound. Such pH adjusting mechanisms may include acidic or alkaline solutions. Whether acidic or alkaline mechanisms are required is dependent on the protecting group used. Hydrolysis may also be achieved via simply mixing the compound, delivered m its puπfied form or from a non-aqueous solution, with water.
Furthermore, the molecular 'hook' could be activated by coming m contact with a suitable nucleophile Such nucleophiles include, but are not limited to, nitrogen-containing functional groups, for example amines, oxygen-containing functional groups, for example hydroxyl groups, phosphorus-containing functional groups, for example phosphmes, and sulfur-contammg functional groups, for example thiol groups and sulfites. For instance, the solution containing the 'hook' compound could be inter-mixed with a separate solution containing a nucleophile including reducmg agents such as ammonium thioglycolate or sodium bisulfite, either before, duπng or after application of the compound to the substrate.
Conversely, the 'hook' compound could be activated by nucleophihc groups present in the substrate itself as in the case of hair that has been reduced or cold waved, i.e. hair that has been treated with a reducing agent either pnor to or simultaneous to the application of the 'hook' compound. The resultmg activated thiol 'hook' could then react directly as a nucleophile with keratmaceous disulfϊdes or oxidatively with the nucleophihc groups present in the substrate, e.g. with free thiol groups that were formed duπng cold waving or reduction. Of course, the latter process could be accelerated or enhanced via the addition of oxidation reagents, i.e. peroxide as in the neutralization step of cold waving of hair. The activation could also be accented via heat or a suitable energy source. For instance, the energy source could be applied to the composition for a sufficient time period to activate the protecting group either before, during or after the composition is applied to the substrate. The energy source may include various types of electromagnetic radiation including ultraviolet, visible, near infrared, infrared, far infrared or microwave radiation.
Other vanous adjuncts that could possibly influence the activation and/or the performance of the "hook" compounds of the present invention include, but are not limited to, (1) Lewis acids such as zmc acetate, tin chlonde, zinc chlonde, zmc stearate, titanium ethoxide, and aluminum tosylate, metal salts such as zmc sulfate, and magnesium sulfate, (n) chelators such as tetrasodium EDTA, disodium EDTA, (in) ionic species capable of lon-painng including anions, cations, quats, amphoteπcs zwittenons etc, (IV) dispersing aids such as anionic surfactants, nonionic surfactants, anionic surfactants, amphoteric surfactants, and zwittenonic surfactants, (v) keratm swelling aids such as ammonia, amines, urea, phosphonc acid, acetic acid and other swelling aids known to those skilled in the art, and (vi) solvent systems wherein the individual solvent molecules are nucleophiles themselves as defined above.
Another embodiment of the present invention compnses a kit compnsing the system compns g the topical compositions of the present invention and either a pH manipulating mechanism or a nucleophile mechanism, and a package compnsmg a first and second chamber; wherein the topical composition is packaged in and delivered out of one chamber and the activation mechanism is packaged in and delivered out of the second chamber. OTHER OPTIONAL INGREDIENTS
The topical composition according to the invention can also typically include an acceptable vehicle to act as a dilutant, dispersant, or earner for the protected thiol compounds in the composition, so as to facilitate the distribution of the protected thiol compounds when the composition is applied to the keratmaceous substrate, i.e., hair, nails, wool, sk etc.
Vehicles other than water can include liquid or solid emollients, solvents, humectants, thickeners and powders. Examples of each of these types of vehicle, which can be used singly or as a mixture of one or more vehicles, are as follows:
Emollients, such as stearyl alcohol, glyceryl mononcmoleate, glyceryl monostearate, mink oil, cetyl alcohol, isopropyl isostearate, steanc acid, isobutyl palmitate, lsocetyl stearate, oleyl alcohol, isopropyl laurate, hexyl laurate, decyl oleate, octadecan-2-ol, isododecane, lsocetyl alcohol, eicosanyl alcohol, behenyl alcohol, cetyl palmitate, silicone oils such as polydimethylsiloxane, cyclomethicone, di-n-butyl sebacate, isopropyl myπstate, isopropyl palmitate, isopropyl stearate, butyl stearate, dimethyl malonate, polyethylene glycol, tπethylene glycol, lanolm, cocoa butter, com oil, cotton seed oil, tallow lard, olive oil, palm kernel oil, rapeseed oil, safflower seed oil, evening primrose oil, soybean oil, sunflower seed oil, avocado oil, olive oil, sesame seed oil, coconut oil, arachis oil, castor oil, acetylated lanolin alcohols, petroleum jelly, mineral oil, butyl myπstate, isosteaπc acid, palmitic acid, isopropyl linoleate, lauryl lactate, mynstyl lactate, decyl oleate, mynstyl mynstate;
Propellants, such as tnchlorofluoromethane, dichlorodifluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, monochlorodifluoromethane, tnchlorotπfluoroethane, propane, butane, isobutane, dimethyl ether, carbon dioxide, nitrous oxide;
Solvents include, but are not limited to, ethyl alcohol, n-propanol, n-butanol, tert-butanol, ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, hexane, tetramethylurea, sulfolane, low molecular weight poly(ethylene oxide), glycerol, propylene glycol, 2-butoxyethanol, amyl alcohol, n-octanol, n- decanol, acetone, acetic acid, butyl acetate, methylene chlonde, isopropanol, acetone, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, dimethyl sulphoxide, dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran;
Powders, such as chalk, talc, fullers earth, kaolm, starch, gums, colloidal silica, sodium polyacrylate, tefraalkyl- and/or tnalkyl-arylammomum smectites, chemically modified magnesium aluminum silicate, organically modified montmoπllonite clay, aluminum silicate, fumed silica, carboxyvmyl polymer, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, ethylene glycol monostearate.
The cosmetically acceptable vehicle will usually form from 10 to 99.9%, preferably from 50 to 99% by weight of the composition and can, in the absence of other cosmetic adjuncts, form the balance of the composition.
The topical compositions according to the invention may be provided in any suitable physical form, for example as low to moderate viscosity liquids, lotions, milks, mousses, dispersions, sprays, gels, foams, aerosols, and creams. These compositions may be produced by procedures well known to the skilled artisan. The cosmetic compositions can be used m vanous manners as other known compositions in the art including but not limited to vanous nnse-off and leave-on applications such as hair shampoos, skm cleansers, skm lotions, hair conditioners, styling sprays, hair mousses, two-m-one shampoos, fabnc softeners, lotions, nail polishes, hair serums, hair dyes, hair waving, etc. The contact time between the cosmetic composition of the present invention and the substrate vanes between 10 seconds and about 1 hour, preferably between 20 seconds and 30 minutes, more preferably between 30 seconds and 15 minutes.
The cosmetic composition of the present invention can be formulated as a fluid, lotion, fluid cream or cream having a viscosity from 500 to 100,000 mPas or above. The composition can be packaged in a suitable container to suit its viscosity and intended use by the consumer For example, a lotion or fluid cream can be packaged in a bottle or a roll-ball applicator or a propellant-dnven aerosol device or a container fitted with a pump suitable for hand or finger operation. When the composition is a cream, it can simply be stored in a non-deformable bottle or squeeze container, such as a tube or a lidded jar
The topical product or composition of the present invention may include an activator as descnbed above In such a case, the inventive composition must be designed to prevent premature activation of the protected thiol compound pnor to use. For instance, the protected thiol compound and the activator may be placed in separate chambers in a dual chamber package, or either of the 'hook' compound or the activator can be placed with shear sensitive (or other induced release) capsules which rupture pπor or duπng use. Alternatively, the protected thiol compound and the activator can be placed in separate packages to enable pre-mixmg or sequential application by the consumer. For examples of typical dual chamber packages see PCT Application WO 96/02230, by Unilever PLC, published February 1, 1996. (Herein mcoφorated by reference.)
Conversely, the cosmetic active of the present invention can be supplied in the punfied form, i.e., as a powder, crystal, wax, gum or liquid. The punfied cosmetic active could be intermixed with any of the above suitable earners either pnor to or simultaneous to the usage by the consumer. For instance, the punfied cosmetic active could be placed withm a compartment that is separated from the earner by a bamer wall. Upon usage, the barrier wall could be broken, disrupted or even removed to enable the punfied cosmetic active to come m contact with and mter-mix with the earner.
The topical composition of the present invention compnses at least one of the above descnbed protected thiol compounds, together with any additional ingredients which are normally to be found m cosmetic treatment compositions for use on hair, skm, or other substrates such as other fibers, textiles, fabπcs, or the like. One or more of the protected thiol compounds may be used, the use of two or more being beneficial for example where a combination of cosmetic benefits is wanted, each denvable from a different cosmetic agent species.
While aqueous or aqueous/alcoholic solution based compositions, or possibly organic- based compositions, m which one or more protected thiol compounds are dissolved by solution are preferred, the compositions if desired or appropπate may compnse stable emulsions or dispersions of the one or more functionahzed cosmetic agents which are designed to be water insoluble. In both of these cases, conventional means for achieving successful deposition and activation of the actιve(s) may be required, for instance, an emulsion or a dispersion could be intermixed with a separate solvent solution via a dual phase package to enable solubihzation and subsequent activation duπng usage
The topical composition according to the invention may include optional benefit materials and cosmetic adjuncts, as long as the benefit matenals or the adjuncts do not eliminate or substantially reduce the performance of the organosulfur functionahzed cosmetic agent. The additional ingredients may include, for example dyes and colonng agents, fragrances; anionic, cationic, non-ionic, amphotenc or zwitteπonic surfactants; buffers, masking fragrances, dispersing agents, stabilizers, cationic polymers, perfumes, non-ionic polymers, anionic polymers, complex coacervates, complex coacervate capsules, metal salts, Lewis acids, buffering agents, particulate thickeners, polymeπc thickeners, wax thickeners, oils, emollients, humectants, moistunzers, dyes, dyes and colonng agents, enzymes, antibodies, preservatives, viscosity enhancers, gelling agents, chelators, silicones or other emulsifying agents, and other common adjuvants well known to those skilled in the art.
Nonlimiting examples of anionic lathenng surfactants useful m the compositions of the present invention are disclosed m McCutcheon's, Detergents and Emulsifiers, North Amencan edition (1990), published by The Manufactunng Confectioner Publishing Co.; McCutcheon's, Functional Matenals, North Amencan Edition (1992); and U.S. Patent No. 3,929,678, to Laughlm et al., issued December 30, 1975, all of which are incoφorated by reference.
A wide vanety of anionic surfactants are potentially useful herein. Nonlimiting examples of anionic lathenng surfactants include those selected from the group consisting of alkyl and alkyl ether sulfates, sulfated monoglycendes, sulfonated olefins, alkylaryl sulfonates, pπmary or secondary alkanesulfonates, alkyl sulfosuccinates, acyltaurates, acyhsethionates, alkyl glyceryl ether sulfonates, sulfonated methyl esters, sulfonated fatty acids, alkyl phosphates, acylglutamates, acylsarcosinates, alkyl sulfoacetates, acylated peptides, alkyl ether carboxylates, acyllactylates, anionic fluorosurfactants, and mixtures thereof. Mixtures of anionic surfactants can be used effectively in the present invention.
Suitable nonionic surfactants include polyoxyalkylene alcohol surfactants, especially alkyl polyethyleneglycol ethers, alkyl polypropyleneglycol ethers, alkyl polyethyleneglycol esters, and alkyl polypropyleneglycol esters and mixtures thereof.
Suitable amphotenc surfactant components for use in the shampoo composition herein include those which are known for use in shampoo compositions or other personal care cleansing composition, and which contain a group that is anionic at the pH of the shampoo composition Concentration of such surfactant components m the shampoo composition preferably ranges from about 0.5 % to about 20%, preferably from about 1% to about 10%, more preferably from about 2% to about 5% by weight of the composition Examples of amphotenc surfactants suitable for use in the shampoo composition herein are descnbed in U S Patents 5,104,646 (Bohch Jr et al ), U S Patent 5,106,609 (Bohch Jr et al ), which descπptions are incoφorated herein by reference Examples of amphoteric detersive surfactants which can be used in the compositions of the present invention are those which are broadly descnbed as denvatives of aliphatic secondary and tertiary amines m which the aliphatic radical can be straight or branched chain and wherein one of the aliphatic substituents contains from about 8 to about 18 carbon atoms and one contains an anionic water solubilizmg group, e g., carboxy, sulfonate, sulfate, phosphate, or phosphonate Examples of compounds falling withm this definition are sodium 3-dodecylamιnopropιonate, sodium 3-dodecylammopropanesulfonate, sodium laurylsarcosmate, N-alkyltauπnes such as the one prepared by reacting dodecylamme with sodium lsethionate according to the teaching of U S Patent 2,658,072, N-higher alkyl aspartic acids such as those produced according to the teaching of U S Patent 2,438,091, and the products sold under the trade name "MLRANOL"™ and described in U S. Patent 2,528,378
Other amphotenc surfactants, sometimes classified as zwittenonic surfactants, such as betames can also be useful in the present invention Such zwitteπonics are considered as amphotencs in the present invention where the zwitteπonic has an attached group that is anionic at the pH of the composition Examples of betaines useful herein include the high alkylbetames, such as cocodimethylcarboxymethylbetaine, cocoamidopropylbetaine, cocobetame, laurylamidopropylbetame, oleylbetaine, lauryldimethylcarboxymethylbetame, lauryldimethyl- alpha-carboxyethylbetaine, cetyldimethylcarboxymethylbetaine, lauryl-bιs-(2- hydroxyethyl)carboxymethylbetame, stearyl-bιs-(2-hydroxypropyl)carboxymethyl betame, oleyldimethyl-gamma-carboxypropylbetame, and lauryl-bιs-(2-hydroxypropyl)-alpha- carboxyethylbetame. The sulfobetaines may be represented by cocodimethyl sulfopropylbetame, stearyldimethylsulfopropylbetaine, lauryldimethylsulfoethylbetame, lauryl-bιs-(2- hydroxyethyl)sulfopropylbetame and the like; amidobetaines and amidosulfobetames, wherein the RCON(CH ) radical is attached to the nitrogen atom of the betame are also useful m this invention Most preferred for use herein is cocoamidopropylbetaine.
If desired or as necessary, one or more additional benefit agents may also be included in the compositions of the invention, for example to modify the overall cosmetic benefit or combination of benefits imparted to the substrate treated with the composition Suitable additional cosmetic benefit agents include the following. (1) conditioning agents, i.e., mateπals which impart one or more visual or tactile benefits such as softness, smoothness, shme, non-flyaway, anti-static, ease of dry and/or wet combing, e g , cationic surfactants, cationic polymers, volatile and/or non-volatile silicones or derivatives thereof, quaternary ammonium salts having at least one long chain alkyl or alkenyl group, protein hydrolysates, quaternized protein hydrolysates, perfluoropolyether mateπals, fatty alcohols, and mixtures thereof;
(n) stylmg/settmg bodying agents, i.e., matenals which give enhanced body and fell to the hair or other fibers or enable them to hold a given shape or style, e.g., various polymers, gums and resins, for example adhesive and/or resinous hydrocarbon mateπals such as per- alk(en)ylhydrocarbon materials, sihcone/siloxane gums or resins, waxes, chitosan and denvatives, salts and complexes thereof, and mixtures thereof;
(in) fiber straightening agents;
(iv) colourants and dyeing agents;
(v) antidandruff agents, e.g., zmc pyndmethione, Octopirox®, chmbazole;
(vi) sun-protective matenals, e.g. sunscreens, especially UV absorbers;
(vπ) hair growth promoters or regulators, e.g. diacylglycerols, glucarolactams, glucarolactones, Mmoxidol®;
(vm) moistunzers, e.g. 2-hydroxyalkanoιc acids, acid soap and complexes thereof, and other emollients, occlusives, humectants;
(IX) pearlescent and/or opacifying mateπals;
(x) oils, e.g. silicone oils, oleic acid, hydrocarbons, isopropyl myπstate, oleyl alcohol, oleates, squalene, sunflower seed oil, rapeseed oil, other plant deπved oils, mineral oil;
(xi) proteins, vitamins, nutπents, stimulants, antiradicals, astnngents;
(xn) herb or other plant extracts, essential oils etc.
(xin) antimicrobial agents, e.g. antibacteπal or anti-mfestive agents;
(xiv) other adjunct mateπals commonly used m cosmetic compositions, e.g., buffenng and/or pH adjusting agents, perfumes, colorings, preservatives, proteins etc.
(xv) anti-malodor agents as those disclosed to treat post-perm odors in US 5,554,364 and EP 0610892.
(xvi) highly substantive polymers and other moieties including polyethylenimines (PEI's) such as those included withm the Polymm® senes supplied by BASF.
(xvn) metal salts compnsmg alkaline earth metals such as magnesium and calcium, transition metals such as zmc, manganese and copper, and the group LTIA metals such as Al. The use of these metal salts for hair treatment is disclosed m WO9609030 and WO9703640 where they are claimed to form metal-sulfur bonds with the hair for use m hair styling and restyhng. Such metal salts could conceivably be employed to complex and interact with the cosmetic active of the present invention. Such interactions should not interfere too greatly with the performance of the cosmetic actives and could potentially positively influence the performance, i.e., metals could complex with the sulfur atom withm cosmetic active and facilitate or induce activation m the form of thiol release
(xvui) chelating agents including disodium EDTA and tetrasodium EDTA. Chelators could enhance the diffusion and adsoφtion by binding to and removing metals present in hard water such as calcium and magnesium. Such hard water ions could conceivably complex with certain ionized "hooks" of the present invention electrostatically and inhibit their solubility.
(xix) hydrotropes such as ammonium xylene sulfate. For instance, if the "hooks" of the present invention are incoφorated with a surfactant matrix, hydrotropes could improve performance by freeing up the "hook" compounds duπng dilution to facilitate improved binding to the substrate.
(xx) dispersing aids which may encompass, but are not limited to, non-iomc surfactants, amphotenc surfactants, and ionic surfactants. If the "hooks" of the present invention are incoφorated withm a non-aqueous matπx of as an insoluble dispersion, dispersing aids could be utilized to enhance solubihzation and subsequent activation.
(xxi) Ion-pair ingredients. For certain ionic "hooks" of the present invention, compounds could be employed that ion-pair with the "hooks" including, but not limited to cations, anions, quaternized ammonium compounds, amphotenc compounds, and metals. Such charged species could be utilized to manipulate the diffusion, adsoφtion and the binding of the "hook" compounds of the present invention.
(xxn) Drying agents designed to minimize residual levels of water m non-aqueous solvent, including, but not limited to molecular sieves.
The pH of the compositions of the present invention is frequently important in achieving optimized chemisoφtion of the protected thiol compound. The most suitable pH for a given composition may depend pnncipally on the type and structure of the protecting group as it pertains to activation. For instance, many of the protecting group can be activated for improved performance via pH catalyzed hydrolysis. In these cases, the pH of the composition would need to be such that the molecular 'hook' is not activated pnor to usage. As descnbed above, duπng usage the pH of the composition containing the molecular 'hook' can be manipulated, i.e., via mter-mixmg with separate pH activating composition, such that the molecular 'hook' is activated duπng or immediately pπor to usage.
The protecting groups of the present invention are to be used withm a pH range from about 1 to about 12, preferably from about 3 to about 11, more preferably from about 4 to about 10. In the cases wherein the protecting group are activated at any of the above pH's, the composition would need to be non-aqueous and essentially free of water or moisture to such a degree that prohibits significant hydrolysis induced activation prior to usage. As such, the water imparted to the composition during usage from the shower, bath or from the wetted substrate could provide the activation required to optimize the resulting chemisoφtion.
As mentioned above, it has suφπsmgly been found that certain protecting groups are not activated hydrolytically at pH's withm the above ascnbed relevant range while still providing durable benefits on hair. For these compounds, the pH of the composition is irrelevant in as much as the composition pH suits the cosmetically active group, R.
Many of the embodiments of the present invention compπse a silicone composition which includes at least one polysiloxane or silicone resm, at least one linker, and at least one molecular hook. For example, said silicone composition typically imparts improved hair care benefits when added to hair care compositions.
The at least one linker is bound to both a molecular hook and to an atom of a polysiloxane or silicone resm. Preferably the at least one linker is bound to a polysiloxane or silicone resm through a silicon, carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur atom, and most preferably to a silicon atom. When more than one linker is present, it is also contemplated that linkers may be bound to a polysiloxane or silicone resm through more than one type of atom, for example through both silicon and carbon atoms.
Therefore, in one embodiment the present invention compnses at least one polysiloxane or silicone resm having the formula:
MaM' DcD'dTeT'fQg
where the subscπpts a, c, d, e, f and g are zero or a positive integer, subject to the limitation that the sum of the subscnpts b, d and f is one or greater; where M has the formula:
Figure imgf000053_0001
M' has the formula:
Figure imgf000053_0002
D has the formula: R3 Sι02/2,
D has the formula.
(Z-X)R4Sι02/2
T has the formula:
R5SI03/2,
T' has the formula:
(Z-X)SιO3/2,
and Q has the formula S1O4/2, where each R*, R^, R3; R45 R5 1S independently at each occurrence a hydrogen atom, C] 22 alkyl, C,_ 2 alkoxy, C2 22 alkenyl, Qs- aryl, and C6 22 alkyl-substituted aryl, and C6.22 aralkyl which groups may be halogenated, for example, flounnated to contain fluorocarbons such as Cι_ 2 fluoroalkyl; Z, independently at each occurrence, represents the molecular hook; and X, independently at each occurrence, represents the linker. The term "alkyl" as used in various embodiments of the present invention is intended to designate both normal alkyl, branched alkyl, aralkyl, and cycloalkyl radicals. Normal and branched alkyl radicals are preferably those containing from 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, and include as illustrative non-hmiting examples methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, tertiary- butyl, pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl. Cycloalkyl radicals represented are preferably those contaimng from 4 to about 12 nng carbon atoms. Some illustrative non-lmutmg examples of these cycloalkyl radicals include cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, mefhylcyclohexyl, and cycloheptyl. Preferred aralkyl radicals are those containing from 7 to about 14 carbon atoms; these include, but are not limited to, benzyl, phenylbutyl, phenylpropyl, and phenylethyl. Aryl radicals used in the vanous embodiments of the present invention are preferably those containing from 6 to 14 nng carbon atoms. Some illustrative non-hmitmg examples of these aryl radicals include phenyl, biphenyl, and naphthyl. An illustrative non-limiting example of a halogenated moiety suitable for R^ groups is tnfluoropropyl.
The polysiloxanes or silicone resms of the present invention are typically prepared by the hydrosilylation of an organohydrogen silicone having the formula
Figure imgf000055_0001
where the subscnpts a, c, d, e, f and g are zero or a positive integer, subject to the limitation that the sum of the subscnpts b, d and f is one or greater, where M has the formula
Rl3Sι01/2,
M^ has the formula-
R23-hHhSιOι/2,
D has the formula
Figure imgf000055_0002
D" has the formula:
H2.1R4 1Sι02/2
T has the formula:
R5SI03/2,
T∑ϊ has the formula:
HSι03/2;
and Q has the formula S1O4/2, where each R*, R^, R3, R4, R-> is independently as defined above.
Hydrosilylation is typically accomplished m the presence of a suitable hydrosilylation catalyst. The catalyst preferred for use with these compositions are descnbed m U.S. Pat. Nos 3,715,334; 3,775,452; and 3,814,730 to Karstedt. Additional background concerning the art may be found at J. L. Spier, "Homogeneous Catalysis of Hydrosilation by Transition Metals, m Advances in Organometallic Chemistry, volume 17, pages 407 through 447, F. G. A. Stone and R West editors, published by the Academic Press (New York, 1979). Persons skilled in the art can easily determine an effective amount of platinum catalyst. Generally, an effective amount ranges from about 0.1 to 50 parts per million of the total organopolysiloxane composition.
The organohydrogen silicone compounds that are the precursors to the compounds of the present invention may be prepared by the process disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,698,654 herewith specifically incoφorated by reference. The '654 patent discloses a sequential catalysis of the ring opening polymenzation of cyclic organosiloxanes using a base catalyst that can be neutralized by a subsequent redistnbution and condensation catalyst such as a Lewis acid catalyst, preferably a phosphonitnhc compound, that permits the rapid synthesis of functionahzed and poly- functionahzed silicone copolymers.
It is to be noted that as pure compounds the subscnpts descnbmg the organohydrogen siloxane precursor and the hydrosilylation adduct of the present invention are integers as required by the vanous rules of chemical stoichiometry. As mixtures of compounds that are descnbed by these formulas the subscnpts will assume non-mtegral values, for the mixtures. The restπctions on the subscnpts heretofore descnbed for the stoichiometnc subscnpts of these compounds are for the pure compounds, not the mixtures.
In specific embodiments of the present invention, the silicone composition typically compnses at least one compound of the following formulas, (I), (IT), (ILL), (X), (XI), and
Figure imgf000056_0001
Figure imgf000057_0001
Figure imgf000057_0002
Figure imgf000057_0003
Figure imgf000057_0004
Figure imgf000058_0001
where each R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, R1 1, R12, R13, R14, Rl5, Rl6, RH R18; Rl9, R20; R21; R22; R23, R24; R25, R26, R27, R28, R29, R305 R31, R32> R33, R34 R35, and
R3^ is independently at each occurrence a hydrogen atom, C1-22 alkyl, Cj.22 alkoxy, C .22 alkenyl, C6.14 aryl, and C6- 2 alkyl-substituted aryl, and C6.22 aralkyl which groups may be halogenated, for example, flourinated to contain fluorocarbons; Z, independently at each occurrence, represents a molecular hook; and X, independently at each occurrence, represents a linker; wherein "m" in each formula has a value in a range between about 0 and about 13,000, preferably about 0 and about 1000, more preferably between about 1 and about 250, still more preferably between about 5 and about 150, even more preferably between about 10 and about 100, and most preferably between about 20 and about 50; "n" in each formula has a value in a range between about 0 and about 13,000, more preferably between about 0 and about 50, more preferably between about 1 and about 20, still more preferably between about 2 and about 10, and most preferably between about 2 and about 5; "m+n" in each formula has a value in a range between about 1 and about 13,000, preferably between about 3 and about 70, more preferably between about 5 to about 50, and most preferably between about 15 and about 50; "q" has a value of at least one and "p+q" has a value of at least 3, preferably in the range of 3-20, more preferably in the range of 3-10, and most preferably in the range of 3-6. The polysiloxane or silicone resin typically has a molecular weight ranging from about 100 to about 1,000,000, preferably from about 250 to about 50,000, more preferably from about 500 to about 25,000, and most preferably from about 500 to about 7,000. The at least one polysiloxane or silicone resin typically has a viscosity in a range between about 20 centipoise and about 2,500,000 centipoise (about 0.02 to about 2500 Pas). The number of X-Z moieties on a polysiloxane or silicone resin in the composition is at least one Ln preferred embodiments the average number of X-Z moieties on a polysiloxane or silicone resin is between about 1 and about 100. more preferably between about 1 and about 20, still more preferably between about 1 and about 6, and most preferably between about 3 and about 6.
Ln one embodiment of the present invention a polysiloxane- or silicone resm-contammg composition compnses a preponderance of a specific linear, branched, cross-linked, or cyclic polysiloxane or silicone resin. In other embodiments a polysiloxane- or silicone resm-contammg composition compnses a mixture of polysiloxanes and/or silicone resins which may include linear, branched, cross-lmked, and cyclic species. Also, suitable compositions may compπse one or more polysiloxanes and/or silicone resms which may contain adventitious amounts of other species, for example ansmg duπng the synthesis process for said polysiloxanes and/or silicone resms, for example at a level of about 0.0001 wt.% to about 5 wt.% based on total sihcon- contaming species. In illustrative examples suitable compositions may contain adventitious amounts of D4, or species containing Si-H, Si-OH, and/or Si-O-alkyl bonds.
Figure imgf000059_0001
The molecular hook may be a heterocyclic pyndinium compound (TV), a heterocyclic tnazmium (V), or a heterocyclic pynmidimum compound (VI) :
wherem Y represents optional substituents on the heterocyclic nng or nng system, X represents the linker, Q" represents a countenon, and A is defined below.
Figure imgf000059_0002
Figure imgf000060_0001
Optional substituents, Y, which can be present on the heterocyclic nng or nng system can be selected from hydrogen or electron withdrawing, electron neutral, or electron donating groups with Hammett sigma para values between -1 0 and +1 5 compnsing carbon-lmked groups of the classes defined as A1, A2, A3, and A4, S-lmked groups including SA1, SCN, SO-.A1, S03A\ SSA1, SOA1, S02NA'A2, SNA1 A2, S(NA')A2, SA'(NA2), SONA'A2, O-lmked groups including OA1, OCN, ONA^2, N-lmked groups including NA'A2, NAΑ2A3+, NA'OA2, NA'SA2, NCO, NCS, N02, N=NA\ N=NOA', NA'CN, N=C=NA*, NA'NA2A3, NA1NA2NA3A4, NA1N=NA2, other miscellaneous groups including CONA'2, CONA'COA2, C(=NAI)NA1A2, CHO, CHS, CN, NC, Hal, and denved groups that connect one or more of the optional substituents via a nng system; Hal is fluonne, chlonne, bromine, or iodine.
A, A1, A2, A3, and A4 each represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following, a straight, branched or mono- or polycychc aliphatic, mono- or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0 to 15 heteroatoms, especially oxygen (O), nitrogen (N), sulfur (S), phosphorus (P), silicon (Si) and can incoφorate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or perfluoro substitution.
The counteπon, Q", can include hahdes, borates, phosphates, tosylates, mesylates, tnflates, and other counteπons known to those skilled m the art.
The linker compnses a Cι-C50 alkyl, aryl, or alkylaryl group, or Cι-C50 heteroaryl group containing one or more heteroatoms, and is optionally functionahzed. Optional functionalization on the linker includes ketones, alkoxys, esters, amides, trifluoromethyl, halogens, mtnles and other polar functional groups known to those skilled m the art. The linker is typically denved from a linker precursor which compnses a linker bound to a leaving group (L) Illustrative leaving groups include hahdes such as chlonde, bromide and iodide, tosylate, mesylate, phosphate; cyclic leaving groups (that is, those m which the leaving group remains bound in the linker) such as epoxy or other cyclic leaving group containing at least one heteroatom; and other leaving groups known to those skilled in the art Preferred leaving groups are bromide and iodide, with iodide being particularly preferred
In synthesis, the leaving group is replaced by a molecular hook, so that the linker becomes bound to a molecular hook In one embodiment the at least one linker precursor may be combined with the at least molecular hook before combining with a polysiloxane or silicone resm In a particularly preferred embodiment the at least one linker precursor may be combined with a polysiloxane or silicone resin before combining with the at least molecular hook Typically, the linker precursor has the formula (VII)
(VII) -D-Ar(Y)π - CH2-L
wherein D compnses a group bound to a polysiloxane or a silicone resm, "Ar" is an aromatic or heteroaromatic group, optionally substituted with one or more substituents, "Y" is a substituent, "L" is as defined above; and "n" has a value between zero and the number of free valence sites on the aromatic or heteroaromatic ring Non-hmiting examples of suitable aromatic and heteroaromatic groups in linkers include phenyl, btphenyl, toluyl, naphthyl, pyπdyl, qumolyl, tπazmyl, pyπmidyl, pyndazmyl, furyl, furoyl, and thienyl. Illustrative examples of substituents (Y) which may be bound to said aromatic or heteroaromatic group include Ci 22 straight chain, branched, cycloahphatic, or aralkyl, C^u aryl, fluoro, chloro, bromo, lodo, nitro, nitroso, nitπle, trifluoromethyl, tπfluoropropyl, alkyloxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyl, alkylamido, alkyl ether, aryl ether, and similar electron-withdrawing, electron-donating, and electron-neutral groups The "D" group may compnse a straight chain, branched, cycloahphatic, or aralkyl group which optionally may contain a functional group, said functional group being bound to D in a pendent position or separating D from the aromatic or heteroaromatic group, or separating D from a polysiloxane or a silicone resm, or m more than one of these positions. Illustrative examples of D groups include Ci 22 alkyl and preferably C2 3 alkyl Illustrative examples of functional groups which may be present with D include carbonyl, alkylcarbonyl, oxycarbonyl, alkyloxycarbonyl, nitπle, amido, alkylamido, tπfluoromethyl, and halogen, such as chloro, bromo, and/or fluoro. Preferred examples of linkers are shown m formulas (VLLI) and (LX) :
Figure imgf000062_0001
Figure imgf000062_0002
Sihcone-containing compositions compnsing at least one polysiloxane or silicone resin, at least one linker, and at least one molecular hook typically impart cosmetic and other benefits m applications such as hair care (for example durable hair care benefit), textile care, cosmetics, oral care, and animal care.
In order that those skilled m the art will be better able to practice the invention, the following examples are given by way of illustration and not by way of limitation.
CHARACTERISTICS
The protected thiol compounds of the present invention, when applied to a ammo acid based substrate, have improved uptake levels and reduced levels of fade or removal. That is the thiol functional groups demonstrate improved attachment of the functional group, R, to the amino acid based substrate and longer lasting attachment than alternative reactive technologies. These benefits are demonstrated without requinng addition steps of reducing or oxidizing the substrate which typically are required in the art to achieve durable cosmetic benefits.
Reduction as defined herein compnses chemical compositions and treatments that induce the nucleophihc cleavage of disulfide bonds m keratm substrates resulting in the formation of free thiol groups in the form of cysteinyl ammo acid residues. Reduction is employed m several commercial products and processes including the permanent-waving of human hair, human hair straightening, human hair depilation, and m the dyeing of wool with fiber reactive dyes. Several compounds and processes known to induce keratm reduction include (1) low molecular weight thiols such as thioglycohc acid, thiolactic acid, cysteine, thioglycerol, thioglycohc hydrazide, thioglycolamide, and glycerol monothioglycolate, (u) sulfides such as salts of hydrogen sulfide, (m) high temperature and alkali wherem the keratm is heated to around 100°C or above by a heating source or steam and wherein the keratm can be contacted with an alkaline solution, (IV) cyanide such as the salts of hydrogen cyanide, (v) phosphines such as tπhydroxymethyl phosphine or its precursor, tetrahydroxymethyl phosphonium chloride, (vi) other miscellaneous reducing agents such as borohydnde, dithiomte, hydrosulfite, and sulfoxylate and (vn) combinations thereof. Reduction as defined herein generally refers to the above processes and compositions which reduce greater than 10% of the disulfide bonds in the keratmaceous substrate The relative quantities of reduced versus unreduced keratin fiber depend on the type of reducing agent, its concentration (or degree of application in the case of heat), the solution-to-hair ratio, pH of the reaction medium, time of reaction, fiber diameter, and the condition of the hair A more detailed discussion on disulfide reduction can be found in the article by Gershon et al (Gershon, S. D.; Goldberg, M. A.; Rieger, M. In Cosmetics Science and Technology, Sagarin. E , eds., pp. 583-627 Interscience, New York (1963)).
Oxidation as defined herein compnses chemical compositions and treatments that induce the oxidative cleavage of disulfide bonds in keratin substrates resulting in the formation of sulfonic acid groups in the form of cysteic acid amino acid residues. Oxidation is employed m several commercial products and processes including the bleaching of human hair, permanent dyeing of human hair with oxidation dyes, and in the dyeing of wool with fiber reactive dyes. Hydrogen peroxide is the pπnciple oxidizing agent used in most oxidizing compositions and is delivered liberally to the substrate as a 3 to 12% solution which may be alkaline. Persulfates, in the form of their sodium potassium and ammonium salts, may also be used to be mixed with the hydrogen peroxide just before use. Other ingredients that may be additionally included in the composition include sodium percarbonate, sodium perborate, magnesium perborate, magnesium dioxide and banum bmoxide. Oxidation as defined herein generally refers to the above processes and compositions which degrade greater than 10% of the disulfide bonds in the keratmaceous substrate. A more detailed discussion on disulfide oxidation can be found in the articles by Zahn and Robbms (Zahn, H. J. Soc. Cosmet. Chem. 17:687 (1966); Rabbins, C; Kelly, C. J. Soc. Cosmet. Chem. 20:555 (1969)).
Both reduction and oxidation of ammo acid based substrates lead to irreparable damage to the substrate by virtue of their destructive chemical reactions. For instance, both reduction and oxidation result in disulfide bond cleavage which has been shown to significantly reduce the wet tensile properties of human hair through 30% extension (Clarence Robbms book: Chemical and Physical Behaviour of Human Hair). Also, reduced hair has been shown to be less πgid in the wet state than unreduced hair (Bogaty, H. J. Soc. Cosmet. Chem. 18:575 (1967)) and the wet bending stiffness and wet stretching stiffness were demonstrated to decrease on oxidized hair (Robbms Book) Furthermore, reduced hair has been shown to exhibit increased fπctional resistance (Schwartz, A.; Knowles, D. J. Soc. Cosmet. Chem. 14:455 (1963)) which is evidence of imparted damage to the hair These demonstrated destructive chemical interactions with keratin have been shown to translate into keratm that is drier, more brittle to the touch, more porous, weaker and which tangles more easily (The Science of Hair Care, by Charles Zviak)
PROCESSES FOR PREPARING THE PROTECTED THIOL COMPOUNDS
The compounds of the invention can be prepared by any of a number of procedures known to those skilled in the art. Several nonlimiting examples are descnbed herein below.
HETEROCYCLIC PROTECTING GROUPS
Alkylthio substituted pyπdmes can be prepared by reaction of halopyπdmes with a variety of thiols in the form of metal salts [Takahashi, Saikachi, Akai, J Pharm Soc Japan, 1943, 63, 153, Adams, Ferreti, J Am Chem Soc , 1959, 81, 4927]. Another method of preparation involves alkylation of pyπdmethiols [Marckwald, Klemm, Trabert, Ber., 1900, B33, 1156; Forrest, Walker, J. Chem. Soc, 1948, 1939].
Alkylthio substituted pyπmidines can be prepared by alkylation of mercaptopyπmidmes [Southon, Pfeiderer, Chem. Ber., 1978, 111, 982; A. G. Geigy, Chem. Abstr , 1969, 70, 68418] or directly from halogenopynmidmes [Semga, Ichiba, Kanazawa, Nishigaki, J. Heterocyclic Chem , 1982, 30, 610].
Alkylthio substituted pyrazmes can be prepared from halogenopyrazmes and appropπate sodium (or potassium) alkyl thiolate at elevated temperatures [Konakahara, Y. Takagi, Bull Chem. Soc. Japan, 1960, 80, 349]. The alternative method is alkylation of mercaptopyrazines [A. Albert, G.B. Barlm, J. Chem. Soc, 1962, 3129].
Alkylthio substituted pyndazmes can be prepared by treatment of halopyπdazmes with a thiol m the form of its alkali salt or with a thiol in the presence of base [Druey, K. Meier, K Eichenberger, Helv. Chim. Ada, 1954, 37, 121; M. Fujisaka, Y. Neno, H. Shinobara, E. Imoto, Bull Chem. Soc. Japan, 1964, 37, 1107; T. Hone, K. Kmjo, T. Ueda, Chem. Pharm. Bull , 1962, 10, 580]. Alkylation of pyndazmethiones and pyndazmethiols as well as some other methodologies are also published. [M. Tisler and B. Stanovnik "Pyndazines and their Benzo Derivatives", m "Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry", 1984, Pergamon Press, Ltd.; M. Tisler and B. Stanovnik "Sulfur Compounds of Pyndazines", in "The Chemistry of Heterocyclic Compounds", 1973, John Wiley&Sons, Inc.] For the alkylthiol substituted tπazmes and tetrazmes, a comprehensive review on the synthesis of these compounds is found in the literature. [M. Tisler and B. Stanovnik, J.Het. Chem , 1971, 785, Reissert and Grube, Chem Ber., 42, 1909, 3720; Gompper and Schoenafinger, Chem Ber , 1 12, 1979, 1529; Arndt, Eistert, Chem. Ber., 60, 2602, 1927; Grundmann et al, J Org Chem , 23, 1958, 1522; Cπstescu, Panaitescu, Pharmazie, 17, 1962, 209; H. Neunhoeffer, H. Hammann, Tet. Lett., 24, 1983, 1767; J. L. Johnson, B. Whitney, L.M. Leslie, J .Het Chem., 17, 1980, 501; S. C. Fields, M. H. Parker, W. R. Eπckson, J Org. Chem , 1994, 8284.]
The six membered O, N, and/or S containing heterocychcs with C=0, C=S or C=C exocyclic groups can be prepared from halogen denvatives of corresponding heterocycles and thiols. [Tominaga, A. Ushirogochi, Y. Matsuda, J. Het.. Chem., 24, 1987, 1557; Y. Tominaga, et al, Chem Pharm, Bull., 32, 3384, 1981; L. Adelfang, J Org. Chem., 31, 2389, 1966; L. W. Singh, H. Junjappa, Synthesis, 5, 531, 1985; W. D. Rudorf, R. Schawrz, Tet Lett , 28 4267, 1987; B Deb, H. Ila, et al, Synthesis, 10, 893, 1987.]
Alkylthio substituted pyndimum denvatives can be prepared by quaternization of the corresponding pyndine alkyl thioethers and other methods. [Yamada, et al, J. Org. Chem., 42, 2180, 1977; M. Yamada, et al, J. Chem. Soc, Chem. Comm., 179, 1979; T. Sakakibara, Y. Watabe, M. Yamada, R. Sudoh, Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn, 61, 247, 1988.]
Alkylthio substituted xanthenes can be prepared from thiols and xanthene with a suitable leaving group [K. J. Divakar, C.B. Reese, et. al., J. Chem. Soc, Perkin Trans 1, 1990 (6), 1753]
Alkylthio substituted pyπmidmium denvatives can be prepared by quaternization of the corresponding pynmidme alkylthioethers and other methods. [Deichmeister, Platoshknn, Khim. Geterosicl. Soedin., 1, 1961, 333; Brown, England, J. Chem. Soc. C, 1971, 2507; Ueda, Ohtsuka, Chem. Pharm. Bull, 21, 1973, 1451.]
Alkylthio substituted pyrazmmm denvatives can be prepared by quaternization of the corresponding pynmidme alkyl thioethers and other methods. [Barlm, Benbow, J. Chem. Soc, Perkin Trans. 2, 1975, 1385; Honz, et al, Tetrahedron, 26, 1970, 2305; B. Geutsen et al, Tetrahedron, 1989, 6519; S. Baton, A. Messmer, J. Het. Chem., 1990, 1673.]
Alkylthio substituted furans can be prepared from the corresponding furan thiols and alkyl hahdes. [Gorzynski, D. Rewicki, Liebigs Ann. Chem., 1986, 625; P.G. McDougal, Y-I Oh, Tet Lett., 27, 139, 1986; R. Tanikaga, et al, J. Chem. Soc, Chem. Com., 1106, 1981; Η. Gotthatdt, CM. Weisshuhn, K. Dorhofer, Chem. Ber., I l l, 3336, 1978; R. Adams, A. Ferretti, /. Am. Chem Soc, 81, 4927, 1959; A. Ferretti, G. Tesi, Chem Ind., p. 1987, 1964; L. M. Yagupolskn, N.V. Kondratenko, V.P. Sambur, Synthesis, 721, 1975; B.L. Fennga, et al, Synthesis, 316, 1988; S.P. Tanis, D.B. Head, Tet. Lett., 25, 4451, 1984.] Alkylthio substituted pyrroles can be prepared by S-alkylation of 2- and 3-pyrrolethιols under standard base-catalyzed conditions. [K. Olsen, H.R. Snyder, J Org Chem , 30, 184, 1965, S Apparao, H. Ila, H Junjappa, Synthesis, 65, 1981, M. Cardelhni et al, Synthesis, 1980, 886; A K. Gupta, H. Ila, et al, Synthesis, 141, 1989; S. Gronowitz, R. Kada, J Het Chem , 1041, 1984; M. Colonna, M. Polni, Gazz Chim Ital , 116, 449, 1986, H. Kojima, H. Inoue, et al, Chem. Lett , 1499, 1989; Y. Tominaga, et al, J Het Chem , 26, 477, 1989.]
Alkylthio substituted thiophenes can be prepared by reacting the alkali salts of thiophene thiols with aliphatic halogen compounds. [Thomas, G. Singh, H. Ila, H. Junjappa, Tet. Lett , 30, 3093, 1989; W -D. Rudorf, A. Schierhorn, M Augustm, J Prakt Chem , 321, 1021, 1979; J Cymerman-Craig, J. W. Loder, Org Synth. 667, 1963; J. Cymerman-Craig, J. W. Loder, J Chem Soc, 237, 1954; E.J. Smutny, J Am Chem. Soc , 91, 208, 1969.]
Alkylthio substituted pyrazoles, the 3- and 5- denvatives, can be prepared by the alkylation of the corresponding pyrazolethiones [Michaelis, Lachwitz, Chem. Ber , 1910, 43, 2106; Michaelis, /in., 1908, 283].
Alkylthio substituted isoxazoles can be prepared by alkylatmg the thio group at the 3 position of isoxazoles [A.Thuiller and JNialle, Bull.Soc. Chim. Fr., 1959, 1398; W. D. Rudrorf and M. Augustin, J. Prakt. Chem., 1978, 320, 585; : K. Tomita, S. Sugai and M.Saito, Chem. Pharm. Bull, 1979, 27, 2415; S. Sugai and K. Tomita, Chem. Pharm. Bull, 1980, 28, 552].
Alkylthio substituted isothiazoles can be prepared by alkylatmg both 3- and 5- mercaptoisothiazoles [K. R. H. Wooldridge, Adv. Heterocycl Chem., 1972, 14, 1; B. Torretta, G. Ronsisvalle, E. Bousquet, F. Guerrera and M. A. Siracusa, Gazz. Chim. Ital, 1980, 133; : K. Gewald, W. Radke and U. Hain, J. Prakt. Chem., 1980, 322, 1021].
Alkylthio substituted tnazoles can be prepared from the corresponding thiotnazoles by S- alkylation with vanous alkyl bromides [M.A. Weaver, R.R. Giles, Ger. Pat., 1970, 1,919,045; J. Hemdl, E. Schroeder, H.W. Kelm, Eur. J Med. Chem. - Chim. Ther., 1975, 10, 121.].
Alkylthio substituted 1 ,2,4-oxadιazoles can be prepared from the corresponding halogen oxadiazoles and thiols. [M. Paton, D.G. Hamilton, 7et. Lett., 24, 5141, 1983; D.J. Greig, et al, J Chem. Soc, Perkin Trans., 607, 1987; Sumitomo Chem Ind KK, Japan Patent, 1005072 (J6- 1005072), 86-05143, 1986.]
Alkylthio substituted 1,2,4-thιadιazoles can be prepared via dipotassium cyanodithioimmocabonate followed by alkylation [W. A. Thaler and J. R. McDivitt, J. Org. Chem., 1971, 36, 10; : Badische Anilin und Soda-Fabrik A.-G., Br. Pat. 1 1 16198 (1968), (Chem. Abstr., 1968, 69, 86995)].
Alkylthio substituted pyrazohum denvatives can be prepared by reaction of the corresponding alkylthiopyrazoles with alkyl hahdes. [Michaelis, Justus Lieb Ann Chem , 331, 1904, 230; v. Auwers, Bergmann, Justus Lieb. Ann. Chem., 472, 1929, 310; Michaelis, Justus Lieb Ann Chem., 361, 1908, 270; K. Hartke, X.-P. Popp, Arch Pharm, 1994, 385.]
Alkylthio substituted tnazohum denvatives can be prepared from halogen derivatives of the corresponding tπazoles and lithium thiolates [M. Begtnup, Bull. Soc Chun. Belg , 1988, 573].
Alkylthio substituted azepines can be obtained from the corresponding halogen derivatives [W. Steghch, H. Bauek, B.M. Grosse, R. Leschke, T. Josten, J. Klem, J. Heterocycl. Chem , 1990, 107].
Alkylthio substituted thiepinium denvatives can be prepared from the corresponding thiepms and an alkylation agent [H. Hofmann, A. Molnar, Tetrahedron Lett , 1977, 1985; H. Hofmann, A. Molnar, C. Gottfent, Liebigs Ann. Chem., 1983, 425; H. Hofmann, H. Fisher, M. De Vnes, Z. Naturforsch, Teil B, 1990, 1573].
Synthesis routes for heterocyclic protected thiol compounds are exemplified by the following non-limitmg examples: EXAMPLE 1
Pyrimidinium, 2- [ [3- [ \ [4- f (2-hvdroxy- l-naphthalenvD-azolphenvU sulfo nyll aminol propyl'thiol-1-methyl-. bromide
Figure imgf000067_0001
3-(4-Acetamιdophenylsulfonamιdo")propyl bromide
To a stirred solution of N-acetylsulfanilyl chlonde (57.15 g, 0.244 mol) m acetone (500 mL) and H20 (187.5 mL) at 0°C was added 3-bromopropylamιne hydrobromide (25.0 g, 0.1 14 mol). When a clear solution was obtained, a solution of sodium hydrogencarbonate (44.15 g, 0.526 mol) in H20 (550 mL) was added dropwise, maintaining the internal temperature at 0-5°C. When the addition was completed, the reaction mixture was heated at 50°C for 5 h, then cooled to room temperature and poured into ice H20 with stimng. After stimng at 5°C for 4 h, the suspension was filtered and the filter cake was washed with H20 and dπed in vacuo to give 34 6 g (90%) An additional reaction was performed to give an additional 63 7 g of similar matenal 3-(4-Amιnophenylsulfonamιdo)propyl bromide
A mixture of 3-(4-acetamιdophenylsulfonamιdo)propyl bromide (34 5 g, 0 103 mol), cone. HCl (43 mL) and EtOH (86 mL) was heated at reflux for 0.5 h, and the suspension was poured into a solution of H20 (200 mL) and EtOH (150 mL) The suspension was neutralized with 30% NaHC03 (aq) to pH 7-8, then filtered The filter cake was washed with H20 and dπed in vacuo to give 27.2 g (90%). An additional reaction was performed to give an additional 48 8 g of similar matenal. 2-Hydroxynaphfhalene, l- 4- [ [3-(bromopropyl)]amιnol-sulfonyl1phenyl]azo1-
A solution of 3-(4-amιnophenylsulfonamιdo)propyl bromide (25.0 g, 0.085 mol) in H20 (300 mL) and cone. HCl (35.5 mL, 0 426 mol) was cooled to 5-10°C then a solution of sodium nitrite (6.70 g, 0.094 mol) in H20 (50 mL) was added portionwise, maintaining the internal temperature below 10°C. When the addition was completed, the solution was stirred for 5 min at 5-10°C, and then the solution was added in three portions (maintaining the internal temperature below 10°C) to a solution of 2-naphthol (12.3 g, 0.085 mol) and sodium hydroxide (22.2 g, 0.554 mol) in H20 (150 mL). Additional sodium hydroxide was added during the addition of the diazonium salt to maintain the pH above pH 7. When the addition was completed, the red-orange suspension was stirred at 5-10°C for 10 mm then allowed to stand at room temperature for 20 h The suspension was acidified with cone HCl (45 mL) (pH <5), stirred for 2 h and filtered The filter cake was triturated with H20 (4 x 500 mL), then filtered and dπed m vacuo at 60°C to give 37 1 g (97%). 2(lH)-Pvnmιdιnethιone. 1-methyl-
To a stirred mixture of 1 -methyl-2-thιourea (76.6 g, 0.85 mol) and malonaldehyde bιs(dιmethyl acetal) (126.8 g, 0.77 mol) m EtOH (1.5 L) was added 10M HCl (76.6 mL, 0.77 mol) one portion. The resulting mixture was stirred at 25°C for 18 h, then spm-evaporated m vacuo. The residue was dissolved in H20 (1.25 L). The solution was made alkaline by the portionwise addition of K2C03 and extracted with CH2C12 (4 x 500 mL). The combined extracts were dπed over MgS0 and spm-evaporated m vacuo to a solid. The crude product was recrystallized from EtOH (600 mL) then dπed to constant weight in vacuo at room temperature to give 22.9 g (23%) of product; mp 186-188°C (uncorrected). An additional reaction was performed to give a total of 40.7 g.
Pynrmdinium. 2-[[3-r[[4-r(2-hvdroxy-l-naphthaIenyl)azol-phenyl1sulfonyl1ammo]propyl1 thiol -1 -methyl-, bromide A solution of 2-hydroxynaphthalene, l-[4-[[[[3-(bromo- propyl)]amιno]sulfonyl)phenyl]azo]- (22 4 g, 0 05 mol) and 2(lH)-pyπmιdιnethιone, 1-methyl- (6 30 g, 0 05 mol) in N,N-dιmethylformamιde (100 mL) was heated at 80°C for 4 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and diluted with Et20 (400 mL) to give a gummy red suspension. The solvent was decanted, and the residue was dissolved m MeOH:acetone (1.1, 300 mL) The solution was concentrated to dryness to a foam. The foam was triturated with acetone (2.5 L) for 5 h at room temperature. The resulting suspension was filtered and the filter cake was washed with acetone and dried in vacuo at 45°C to constant weight to give 16.1 g (56%) of solid, mp (uncorrected) 169-172°C The proton NMR spectrum was consistent with the proposed structure. Elemental analysis: C H N S Br
Calc. 50.44 4.21 12.19 11.16 13.91
Obs. 50.27 4.47 12.02 11.13 13.97
EXAMPLE 2
Pyrimidinium, l-methyl-2-[2-f[f[5-(dimethylamino -l-naphthalenyllsulfonyllaminol ethyllthiol-, bromide
Figure imgf000069_0001
Pynmidme, 1 ,2-dιhvdro-l -methyl-2-thιo-
To a stirred mixture of l-methyl-2-thιourea (76.6 g, 0.850 mol) and malonaldehyde bιs(dιmethyl acetal) (126.8 g, 0.7722 mol) in EtOH (1.5 L) was added 10M HCl (76.6 mL, 0.766 mol) m one portion. The resulting mixture was stirred at 25°C for 18 h, then spin-evaporated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved m H20 (1.5 L). The solution was made alkaline by the portionwise addition of K2C03 (60 g), then extracted with CH2C12 (3 x 1.0 L). The combined extracts were dπed over MgS0 (20 g) and spm-evaporated m vacuo to give 100.6 g (103 3%) of crude product as a solid. This was combined with 24.5 g of previously obtained material and dissolved in reflux g EtOH (900 mL) The solution was stored at 3°C for 18 h. The resulting precipitate was collected by filtration and dπed to constant weight in vacuo to give 30 0 g (24.0% recovery) of purified product.
Pvπmidmium, 1 -methyl-2-[2-[ [[ [-5 -(dimethylamino)- 1 -naphthalenyll sulfonyl] ammo] ethyl] thiol -, bromide
A stirred mixture of the preceding intermediate (10.0 g, 79.3 mmol) and naphthalenesulfonamide, 5-(dιmethylammo)-N-(2-bromoethyl)- (28.3 g, 79.3 mmol) in 1- propanol (150 mL) was heated at reflux for 2 h. The mixture was spin-evaporated in vacuo to a solid residue. The residue was triturated with acetone (200 mL), then collected by filtration and dπed to constant weight in vacuo at 25°C to give 32.0 g (83.6%) of the target compound, mp 196- 198°C (d) (uncorrected). Proton NMR and LR spectra were consistent with the proposed structure. Elemental analysis: C H N S Br
Calc. 47.20 4.79 11.59 13.27 16.53
Obs. 47.25 4.73 1 1.60 13.19 16.68
EXAMPLE 3
Pyridinium, l-methyl-5-(trifluoromethyl)-2-f2-f[[f5-(dimethylaminoVl-naphthalenyl] sulfonyllaminolethyll-thiol-, bromide
Figure imgf000070_0001
N-Methyl-5-tnfluoromethylpyndone
A stirred mixture of 5-(tπfluoromethyl)-2-pyndinol (34.8 g, 0.213 mmol), potassium carbonate (101 g, 0.730 mol) and lodomethane (48.7 mL, 0.783 mol) in dry acetone (750 mL) in a sealed bottle was heated at 59°C for 7 h then cooled to ambient temperature. The reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated to dryness to give a yellow solid. The crude product was punfied by column chromatography (1 kg silica gel) eluted with hexanes:EtOAc (1 : 1) to give a white solid. The solid was dned in vacuo at room temperature for 2 h to give 34.3 g (90% yield). Additional reactions were performed to give a total of 86.9 g of similar product. 2( lH)-Pyπdιnethιone, l-methyI-5-(tπfluoromethyl)-
A stirred mixture of the preceding intermediate (34.3 g, 0.194 mol) and Lawesson's Reagent (39.2 g, 0.097 mol) m dry toluene (195 mL) was heated at reflux for 10 mm, then the toluene was removed by evaporation. The residue was distilled in vacuo (Kugelrohr apparatus) at 120-140°C/3 mm Hg to give pure product as a yellow solid (36.2 g, 96%). Additional reactions were performed to give a total of 89.9 g of similar matenal.
Pyndimum, l-methyl-5-(tnfluoromethyl)-2-[2-[[[[5-(dιmethylamιno)-l-naphthalenyl] sulfonyl]amιno]ethvH-fhιo]-, bromide.
A stirred mixture of the preceding intermediate (46.7 g, 0.242 mol) and naphfhalenylsulfonamide, 5-(dιmethylammo)-N-(2-bromoethyl)- (86.3 g, 0.242 mol) in dry 1- propanol (270 mL) was refluxed for 4.5 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated to give the crude product as a yellow foam. This foam was dissolved in acetone (450 mL) and slowly added to a stimng solution of hexanesπsopropyl ether (2: 1, 12 L) to give a yellow precipitate. The precipitate was collected by filtration, washed with hexanes (500 mL) and dned in vacuo at 40°C. This solid was reprecipitated twice more in a similar fashion to give 92.4 g (69%) of pure target. An additional reaction was performed to give a total of 119.9 g of the target compound; m.p. 125- 129 degrees C (uncorrected). Proton NMR and LR spectra were consistent with the proposed structure. analysis: C H N S Br
Calc. 45.82 4.21 7.63 11.65 14.52
Calc* 45.87 4.61 7.23 11.03 13.75
Obs. 45.91 4.62 7.01 10.78 14.15
*Calc. for C2iH23BrF3N302S2 0.1 ι-Pr20 0.2 acetone 0.5 H20
EXAMPLE 4
Pyrimidinium, 2-rr3,3,4,4,5,5,6,6,7.7,8,8,9,9.10,10,10-heptadecafluorodecyl)thiol-l-methyl-, iodide
Figure imgf000072_0001
2(lH)-Pvnmιdmethιone. 1 -methyl
To a stirred mixture of 1 -methyl-2-thιourea (76.6 g, 0.85 mol) and malonaldehyde bιs(dιmethyl acetal) (126.8 g, 0.77 mol) m EtOH (1.5 L) was added 10M HCl (76.6 mL, 0.77 mol) in one portion. The resulting mixture was stirred at 25°C for 18 h, then spin-evaporated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in H2-0 (1.25 L). The solution was made alkaline by the portionwise addition of K2C03 and extracted with CH2C12 (4 x 500 mL). The combined extracts were dπed over MgS04 and spm-evaporated in vacuo to a solid. The crude product was recrystalhzed from EtOH (600 mL) then dπed to constant weight in vacuo at room temperature to give 22.9 g (23%) of product; mp 186-188°C (uncorrected). An additional reaction was performed to give a total of 40.7 g.
Pyrimidinium. 2-r(3.3.4.4.5.5.6.6.7.7.8.8.9.9.10.10.10-heptadecafluorodecv' hio1-l-methyl-. iodide
A solution of the preceding intermediate (22.9 g, 0.181 mol) and l-ιodo-lH,lH,2H,2H- perfluorodecane (100.5 g, 0.175 mol) in acetone (1.2 L) was heated at reflux for 20 h, cooled to 15°C and filtered. The filter cake was washed with hexanes (500 mL) and dried m vacuo at room temperature to give 48.6 g (40% yield); mp 196-196.5°C (uncorrected). A second reaction was performed to give 11.1 g(38% yield); mp 206-206.5°C (uncorrected). The proton NMR spectrum was consistent with the proposed structure. Elemental analysis: C H N S
Calc. 25.73 1.44 4.00 4.58 Obs. 25.68 1.47 4.05 4.56
EXAMPLE 5
Benzothiazolium, 2- 1 [2- f [ '5-(dimethvIamino)-l -naphthalenyll -sulfo nyll aminol ethyll thiol-3- methyl-, bromide
Figure imgf000073_0001
Naphthalenesulfonamide, 5-(dιmethylamιno)-N-(2-bromo-ethyl)-
A suspension of 5-dιmethylammonaphthalene-l-sulfonyl chlonde (52.5 g, 0.194 mol) and 2-bromoethylamme hydro-bromide (42.3 g, 0.206 mol) in THF (550 mL) was cooled to 2°C. A solution of tnethylamme (40.3 g, 0.398 mol) in THF (230 mL) was added dropwise over a 2 h penod while maintaining the internal temperature below 6°C. After complete addition the mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 72 h. The mixture was claπfied then concentrated to an orange oil which was chromatographed over silica (2.2 kg) packed and eluted with hexanes- EtOAc (3: 1). Fractions (500 mL) containing the punfied product were combined, clanfied then concentrated to a damp solid. This matenal was triturated in hexanes (250 mL), collected on a filter, washed with hexanes (50 mL) then dned to constant weight in vacuo at room temperature to give 61.7 g (89% yield) of product as off-white crystalline solid.
Benzothiazohum. 2-rr2-r[[5-(dιmethylamιno)-l-naphthalenyllsulfonyl]ammolethyl]thιo1-3- methyl-. bromide
A solution of naphthalenylsulfonamide, 5-(dιmethyl-ammo)-N-(2-bromoethyl)- (15.0 g, 42.0 mmol) and 3-methyl-benzothιazole-2-thιone (11.0 g, 60.7 mmol) m acetone (25 mL) was heated at reflux for 4 days (Note 1). After cooling to 5°C, the mixture was diluted with Et20 (150 mL) and suction filtered. The filter cake was washed with Et20 (200 mL) and sucked dry to give the crude product. The crude product was dissolved m a mixture of CH2C12 (140 mL) and MeOH (30 mL) then diluted with EtOAc:hexanes (1.2, 750 mL). The suspension was suction filtered and the filter cake was washed with Et20 (200 mL), then dπed m vacuo at room temperature for 4 h to give the target compound (9.0 g, 40%) as a yellow solid. An additional reaction was performed to give a total of 22 9 g of target compound, mp(uncorrected) 156-159°C Proton NMR and LR spectra were consistent with the proposed structure. Elemental analysis: C H N S Br
Calc 49.06 4 49 7 80 17 86 14.84
Obs. 49.01 4.33 7.69 17 68 15.02
EXAMPLE 6 lH-Imidazolium, l,3-dimethyl-2-f2-[f[f5-(dimethylaminoVl-naphthaIenyllsulfonyll aminolethyllthio iodide
Figure imgf000074_0001
Naphthalenesulfonamide. 5-(dιmethylamιno)-N-(2-bromo-ethyl)-
A suspension of 5-dιmethylammonaphthalene-l-sulfonyl chlonde (50.0 g, 0.185 mol) and 2-bromoethylamme hydro-bromide (40.4 g, 0.197 mol) in THF (500 mL) was cooled to 2°C A solution of tnethylamme (38.5 g, 0.380 mol) in THF (250 mL) was added dropwise over a 2 h penod while maintaining the internal temperature below 6°C. After complete addition the mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 17 h. The mixture was clanfied, and the filter cake nnsed with THF to remove all of the product. The combined filtrates were concentrated to an orange oil which was chromatographed over silica (2.2 kg) packed and eluted with hexanes- EtOAc (3: 1). Fractions (500 mL) containing the punfied product were combined, clanfied, then concentrated to a damp solid. This matenal was triturated m hexanes (250 mL), collected on a filter, washed with hexanes (50 mL) then dπed to constant weight in vacuo at 40°C to give 56 9 g (86.1%) yield) of product as an off-white crystalline solid. lH-Imidazole. l-methyl-2-[2-[[[[5-(dιmethylamιno)-l-naphthalenvnsulfonyl]amιno1ethyl] thio]-
A suspension of sodium hydπde (2 1 g of 60%, 52 mmol) in DMF (25 mL) was cooled to 10°C A solution of 2-mercapto-l-methylιmιdazole (6.0 g, 52 mmol) in DMF (50 mL) was added dropwise over a 30 min period while maintaining the internal temperature below 15°C After complete addition, the reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 1 5 h. A solution of the preceding intermediate (18.7 g, 52.3 mmol) in DMF (75 mL) was added in one portion and the resulting solution was stirred at 50°C for 1.5 h then cooled to ambient temperature. The reaction solution was poured over cold Η20 (3 L) then extracted with CH2C12 (1 x 1 L and 1 x 500 mL) The combined extracts were washed with H20 (750 mL) and saturated brine (750 mL), dπed over Na2S04, clanfied, then concentrated in vacuo to a green oil This material was combined with similar material from a smaller reaction and passed through a pad of silica (750 g) packed with EtO Ac -hexanes (1: 1) then eluted with 1.1, 6 L; 2:1, 3 L; 3: 1, 4 L and finally EtOAc, 3 L. Fractions containing the punfied product were combined, clanfied then concentrated to a green glass which was tnturated in THF (50 mL). The resulting solid was dned to constant weight in vacuo to give 23.6 g (93% yield) of matenal as a light green solid. lH-Imidazolium, l,3-dιmethyl-2- 2-[[rr5-(dιmethylammo)-l-naphthalenyllsulfonyl]amιno] ethyllthiol-. iodide
A solution of the preceding intermediate (23.6 g, 60.4 mmol), DMF (51 mL) and lodomethane (3.76 mL, 60.4 mmol) was stirred m a flask sealed with a rubber septum for 18 h at ambient temperature. The reaction solution was diluted with Et20 (1.5 L) and vigorously stirred for 30 mm. The resulting solid was collected on a filter, washed with Et20 (2 x 50 mL) then dried m situ. This matenal was dissolved in CΗ2C12 (300 mL) and MeOH (15 mL), clarified, diluted with EtOAc (300 mL), then concentrated to a thick slurry. The resulting solid was collected on a filter, washed with EtOAc (2 x 75 mL), then dπed to constant weight in vacuo to give 27.0 g (71% yield) of product, mp(uncorrected) 184-186 degrees C. Proton NMR and LR spectra were consistent with the proposed structure. Elemental analysis: C H N S
Calc. 42.86 4.73 10.52 12.04
Obs. 42.89 4.73 10.54 12.20
EXAMPLE 7
Pyrimidinium, l-methyl-2-f[8-f(3,4,5-trihydroxybenzoyl -oxyloctyllthiol-, bromide
Figure imgf000076_0001
8-Bromooctyl gallate
A suspension of gallic acid (23.5 g, 0.138 mol), 8-bromo-l -octanol (90.0 g, 0.430 mol), and cone, sulfuric acid (3.0 mL) was stirred and heated at 120-130°C for 0.5 h, then cooled to 100°C and stirred at 100°C for 1 h. Cooled to room temperature, diluted with EtOAc (300 mL), and washed with H20 (2 x 200 mL) and bπne (200 mL). The organic layer was dned (MgS04), filtered, and concentrated to give the crude product (111 g). The crude material was purified by column chromatography (2.2 kg silica gel eluted with EtOAc:hexanes (2:3)) to give 33.3 g (67%) as a white pasty solid. 2(lH)-Pyπmιdιnethιone, 1-methyl-
To a stirred mixture of 1 -methyl-2-thιourea (76.6 g, 0.85 mol) and malonaldehyde bιs(dιmethyl acetal) (126.8 g, 0.77 mol) in EtOH (1.5 L) was added 10M HCl (76.6 mL, 0.77 mol) in one portion. The resulting mixture was stirred at 25°C for 18 h, then spm-evaporated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in H20 (1.25 L). The solution was made alkaline by the portionwise addition of K2C03 and extracted with CH2C12 (4 x 500 mL). The combined extracts were dned over MgS04 and spm-evaporated in vacuo to a solid. The crude product was recrystalhzed from EtOH (600 mL) then dned to constant weight in vacuo at room temperature to give 22.9 g (23%) of product; mp 186-188°C (uncorrected). An additional reaction was performed to give a total of 40.7 g. Pyπmidinium, l-methyl-2-rr8-r(3.4.5-tnhvdroxybenzoyl)-oxy]octyl]thιo]-, bromide
To a solution of 8-bromooctyl gallate (33.3 g, 0.092 mol) in 1-propanol (170 mL) was added the above intermediate (11.7 g, 0.093 mol), and the resulting suspension was heated at reflux (97°C) for 1.5 h (a solution was obtained at 90°C). The hot solution was cooled to 20°C to give a suspension. The suspension was diluted with EtOAc (1.0 L) and suction filtered. The filter cake was washed with EtOAc (400 mL) and air dned. The crude product (42.4 g of yellow solid) was tnturated m acetone (3.0 L) at room temperature for 20 h. The suspension was suction filtered; the filter cake was washed with acetone (50 mL) and dned to constant weight in vacuo at 35°C to give 25.4 g (57%) as a light yellow solid; mp 141-143°C (dec) (uncorrected). The proton NMR spectrum was consistent with the proposed structure. Elemental analysis: C H N S Br
Calc. 49.28 5.58 5 75 6.58 16.39
Obs. 49.21 5.53 5.79 6.50 16.32
EXAMPLE 8
Pyrimidinium. l-methyl-2-f'3-f(3.4.5-trihvdroxybenzoyl)-oxy1propyl|thiol-, bromide
Figure imgf000077_0001
3-Bromopropyl gallate
A suspension of gallic acid (40.0 g, 0.235 mol), 3-bromo-l-propanol (100 g, 0.719 mol), and cone, sulfunc acid (3.0 mL) was stirred and heated at 115-120°C until a solution was obtained (10-20 mm), then cooled to 100°C and stirred at 100°C for 3 h. Cooled to room temperature, diluted with EtOAc (500 mL), and washed with H20 (250 mL), 20% NaHC03 (2 x 250 mL), and bnne (250 mL). The organic layer was dπed (MgS04), filtered, and concentrated to give the crude product (137 g). The crude matenal was punfied by column chromatography (2.2 kg silica gel eluted with EtOAc:hexanes (1: 1)) to give 65.1 g (95%)as a cream-colored pasty solid. 2(lH)-Pvnmιdmethιone, 1-methyl-
To a stirred mixture of l-methyl-2-thιourea (573.8 g, 6.365 mol) and malonaldehyde bιs(dιmethylacetal) (949.6 g, 5.783 mol) in EtOΗ (11.3 L) was added 10M ΗC1 (575 mL, 5.75 mol) in one portion. The resulting mixture was stirred at 25°C for 18 h then concentrated m vacuo. The residue was dissolved in Η20 (11.1 L) and the solution was made alkaline by portionwise addition of K2C03 (448 g). The alkaline solution was extracted with CH2C12 (3 x 7.2 L) and the combined extracts were dned (MgS04), filtered, and concentrated to give the crude product. The crude product was dissolved in refluxmg EtOH (4.0 L) and stored at 3°C for 18 h. The resulting precipitate was collected by suction filtration and dπed to constant weight in vacuo at 40°C to give 94.1 g (12.9%) as a yellow solid. Pynmidinium, l-methyl-2-r 3-[(3,4.5-tnhvdroxybenzoyl)-oxy]propyllthιo]-. bromide
To a solution of 3-bromopropyl gallate (54.9 g, 0 19 mol) in 1-propanol (350 mL) was added the preceding intermediate (23 8 g, 0.19 mol), and the resulting suspension was heated at reflux (97°C) for 0 5 h (a solution was obtained at 90°C, then after a few minutes at reflux a precipitate began to fall out of solution). The hot suspension was suction filtered, and the filter cake was washed with 1-propanol (4 x 75 mL) and dned to constant weight in vacuo at 35°C to give 33.5 g (42%) as a light yellow solid; mp 223-225°C (dec) (uncorrected). The proton NMR spectrum was consistent with the proposed structure. Elemental analysis: C H N S Br
Calc. 43.18 4.11 6.71 7.68 19.15
Obs. 42 91 4.14 6.68 7.63 19.15
EXAMPLE 9
Pyridinium. l-methyl-2-*(hexadecvDthiol-, bromide
Figure imgf000078_0001
Methyl-2-thιopyndone (1)
A stirred mixture of 1 -methyl -2 -pyπ done (20.0 g, 183 mmol) and Lawesson's Reagent (37.0 g, 91.5 mmol) m dry toluene (100 mL) was heated at reflux for 15 mm. then the toluene was removed by evaporation in vacuo at 60°C. The residue was distilled m vacuo to give crude product; bp, 175-177°C (13 torr). This yellow liquid was dissolved m MeOH (15 mL), and the solution was cooled to 0°C with stimng. The precipitated solid was collected by filtration, πnsed with hexanes (2 x 40 mL) and dned to constant weight m vacuo to give 14.0 g (61%) of matenal suitable for further transformation. One additional reaction was performed to furnish another 27.7 g lot of similarly pure intermediate. Pyπdimum. l-methyl-2-r(hexadecyl')thιo]-, bromide (2)
A stirred mixture of the preceding intermediate (11.1 g, 88.7 mmol) and 1- bromohexadecane (27.1 g, 88.8 mmol) m 1-PrOH (100 mL) was heated at reflux for 3.5 h then clarified by filtration and stored at 3°C for 18 h The resulting crystalline precipitate was collected by filtration, rinsed with EtOH (3 x 15 mL) followed by Et20 (2 x 50 mL), then dπed to constant weight in vacuo at 60°C to give 31 1 g (81%) of purified product One additional reaction was performed to give another 66.7 g lot of purified material. The two lots were thoroughly blended to give a total of 97.8 g of product as a white solid; mp(uncorrected) 111-1 14 degrees C. Proton NMR and LR spectra were consistent with the proposed structure. Elemental analysis: C H N S Br
Calc. 61.37 9.37 3.25 7.45 18.56
Obs. 61.46 9.32 3.23 7.40 18.65
EXAMPLE 10 lH-Imidazolium, l,3-dimethyl-2-(hexadecylthio iodide
Reaction sequence:
Figure imgf000079_0001
To a stirred solution of 2-mercapto-l-methyhmιdazole (36.3 g, 318 mmol) in dry DMF (250 ml ) was added NaH (12.7 g, 60% in mineral oil, 318 mmol) in portions over 0.5 h. The resulting solution was stirred for an additional 1 h, then hexadecyl bromide (lOOg, 97%, 318 mmol) was added m one portion. The reaction mixture was heated for 1 h with stirring at 50°C, then cooled and added to stirred ιce-H20 (1.5 L). The resulting biphasic mixture was extracted with hexanes (2 x 500 mL). The combined hexane extracts were dπed over Na2S04 (25 g), then clanfied and treated, m one portion, with Mel (lOOg, 705 mmol). The stirred mixture was heated at reflux for 1.0 h then cooled to room temperature. The precipitated solid was collected by filtration and dissolved in CHC13 (1.0 L). The resulting solution was clanfied, diluted with hexanes (1.0 L) then concentrated in vacuo at 40°C to a volume of approximately 1.0 L. The resulting precipitate was collected by filtration and dπed to constant weight in vacuo at 40°C to give 80.9 g (53%o) of purified product; mp, 124-126°C (corrected). Elemental analysis: C H N S I
Calc. 52.49 8.60 5.83 6.67 26.41
Obs. 52.63 8.60 5.75 6.59 26.28 sp2 CARBON PROTECTING GROUPS
The sp2 protected thiol compounds of the present invention can be prepared by any of a number of procedures known to those skilled m the art.
For example, the thiocarboxyhc acid denvatives can be prepared by reacting acyl chlorides with H2S or alkylthiols. The carbamothioic acid derivatives can be prepared via hydrolysis of thiocyanates. The dithiocarboxyhc acid derivatives can be prepared by treating carboxylic acids with P4Sιo and a primary alcohol. The carbonodithioic acid derivatives can be prepared by the addition of alcohols to carbon disulfide in the presence of base to form a salt of the acid and by imparting an alkyl halide to the reaction mixture to form the ester. The carbamodithioic acid derivatives can be prepared by the addition of pπmary or secondary amines to carbon disulfide.
The following non-hmitmg examples illustrate exemplary methods of preparing a few compounds of the invention.
EXAMPLE 11
1-Naphthalenesulfonamide, 5-(dimethylamino)-N-[2-['(2-(ethoxy)thioxomethyl1thiol ethyl]-
Figure imgf000080_0001
Naphthalenesulfonamide, 5-(dιmethylamιno -N-(2-bromoethyl)
A suspension of 5-dιmethylammonaphthalene-l-sulfonyl chlonde (50.0 g, 0.185 mol) and 2-bromoethylamιne hydro-bromide (40.4 g, 0.197 mol) m THF (500 mL) was cooled to 2°C. A solution of tnethylamme (38.5 g, 0.380 mol) in THF (250 mL) was added dropwise over a 2 h penod while maintaining the internal temperature below 6°C. After complete addition the mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 17 h. The mixture was clanfied then concentrated to an orange oil which was chromatographed over silica (2.2 kg) packed and eluted with hexanes- EtOAc (3:1). Fractions (500 mL) containing the punfied product were combined, clarified, then concentrated to a damp solid. This matenal was tnturated m hexanes (250 mL), collected on a filter, washed with hexanes (50 mL) then dπed to constant weight in vacuo at 40°C to give 56 9 g
(86 1% yield) of product as a off-white crystalline solid.
1 -Naphthalenesulfonamide, 5-(dιmethylammo)-N-[2-[ (ethoxy)-thιoxomethyllthιo]ethyl]-
A mixture of the preceding intermediate (43 3 g, 121 mmol) and O-ethylxanthic acid, potassium salt (19 7 g, 123 mmol) in anhydrous acetone (430 mL) was heated at reflux for 18 h The mixture was cooled to ambient temperature, clanfied, and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to an oil. This material was chromatographed over silica gel (1 kg) packed and eluted with hexanes-EtOAc (3: 1). Fractions containing the purified product were combined, clarified, then concentrated to a thick slurry which was diluted with hexanes (200 mL). The resulting solid was collected on a filter, rmsed with hexanes (2 x 75 mL), then dπed to constant weight in vacuo to give 19.1 g of product. The mixed fractions from this column were combined, concentrated, then rechromatographed over silica gel (2 0 kg) packed and eluted with hexanes-EtOAc (3 1) Fractions containing the punfied product were combined, clanfied, then concentrated m vacuo to a thick oil. This was dissolved m CH2C12 (50 mL), diluted with hexanes (200 mL), then cold evaporated to a thick slurry. The resulting solid was collected on a filter, washed with hexanes (100 mL), then dπed to constant weight in vacuo to give 18.9 g of product. A second crop of matenal was obtained by cold evaporating the two combined filtrates to give 0.5 g of product (total yield 38.5 g, 82%), mp(uncorrected) 85-86 degrees C. Proton NMR and LR spectra were consistent with the proposed structure. Elemental analysis: C H N S
Calc. 51.23 5.56 7.03 24.13
Obs. 51.19 5.56 6.99 24.14
EXAMPLE 12 S-hexadecyl ethanethioate
Reaction sequence:
O O
I I II
CH3CC1 + HS(CH25CH3 *» CH3CS(CH2)i5CH3
A mixture of acetyl chlonde (1.0 L, 1.1. kg, 14 mol) and 1-hexadecanethιol (95%, 168 g, 0.62 mol) was stirred at reflux for 3 h, then volatile components were removed by evaporation in vacuo (60°C, 5 torr). The residue was recrystalhzed from warm (35°C) hexanes (500 mL) by cooling at 4°C for 18 h. The weight in vacuo to give 174.5 g (94%) of punfied product; mp, 29- 31°C (corrected). Elemental analysis: C H S
Calc. 71.93 12.07 10.67;
Found 72.17 12.12 10.84. The NMR (500 MHz) and LR agreed with the proposed structure.
EXAMPLE 13
-y-(4-AminobutvP hexadecanethioate hydrochloride
Reaction sequence:
O o s
II a. N(CH2)4Br CH3CH2OCS2 " K N(CH2)4SCOCH2CH3
O 1 o
H2NNH2 * H20 HCl
HCl * H2N(CH2)4SH
2
O O
II II c. CH3(CH2)14CC1 CH3(CH2)14CS(CH2)4NH2 * HCl
a. (4-Phthalιmιdobutyl)xanthιc acid. O-ethyl ester (1)
A mixture of N-(4-bromobutyl)phthahmide (138 g, 489 mmol) and O-ethylxanthic acid, potassium salt (97.7 g, 609 mmol) in DMF (400 mL) was stirred for 1 h then blended into stirred ιce-H20 (2 kg). The precipitated solid was collected by filtration, air-dπed and doubly recrystallized from boilmg EtOH (2 x 700 mL). The recovered solid was dned to constant weight m vacuo at 50°C to give 114.8 g (73%) of matenal suitable for further transformation. b. 4-Ammo-l-butanethiol hydrochlonde (2)
To a solution of (I) (105.8 g, 327.4 mmol) in CH3CN (400 mL) was added H2NNH2 * H20 (47.6 mL, 49.2 g, 980 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 0.5 h at 60°C then evaporated in vacuo at 40°C to a solid residue. This matenal was dissolved in H20 (450 mL) and the pH of the solution was adjusted to 2-3 with concentrated HCl. The resulting suspension was stored for 1.0 h at 0°C, then the precipitate was removed by filtration. Additional concentrated HCl (200 mL) was added to the filtrate and the yellow solution was heated at reflux for 6.0 h, dunng which time the evolution of COS gradually slowed to a stop. The resulting solution was evaporated in vacuo at 60°C to a semi-solid residue. This residue was dried by azeotropic distillation with toluene (3 x 100 mL) and then extracted into CH C12 (900 mL). Evaporation of the clarified CH2C12 extract yielded 31 4 g (68%) of the hydrochloride salt as a very pale yellow semi-solid suitable for further transformation. 5-(4-Ammobutyl) hexadecanethioate hydrochloride (3)
A solution of (TT) (31.4 g, 222 mmol) and palmitoyl chloride (60.9 g, 222 mmol) in dry CH3CN (400 mL) was stirred at 70°C for 2.0 h and then at 10°C for 1.0 h. The precipitated solid was collected by filtration and air-dned. This material was recrystallized from boiling EtOH (400 mL) to give a white crystalline solid which was collected by filtration, washed with Et20 (3 x 100 mL) and dried to constant weight m vacuo at 60°C to give 52.0 g (62%) of purified product; mp, 138-141°C (corrected). Elemental analysis: C H Cl N S
Calc. 63.20 11.14, 9.33 3.69 8.44;
Found 63.32 11.16 9.22 3.71 8.37. The NMR (500 MHz) and LR agreed with the proposed structure.
EXAMPLE 14
Methanaminium, N-methyl-N-[l-(hexadecv'thio)ethylidenel-, bromide
S N(CH3)2 + Br"
I I I I
CH3CN(CH3)2 + CH3(CH2)15Br *• CH3(CH2)15S-C-CH3
1 To a stirnng solution of N,N-dιmethylthιoacetamιde (33.8 g, 0.33 mol) in acetomtπle (300 mL) was added 97% 1-bromohexadecane (103.1 g, 0.33 mol) and tetrahydrofuran (200 mL), to give a complete solution . The mixture was heated at reflux for 72 h. After cooling to 10°C, the suspension was suction filtered, and the filter cake was washed with Et20 (500 mL). The white solid was dried in vacuo at room temperature for 6 h to give 68.2 g (51%) of target compound as a white solid; mp 80-92°C (uncorrected). Proton NMR and LR spectra were consistent with the proposed structure. Elemental analysis: C H N S Br
Calc. 58.80 10.36 3.43 7.85 19.56
Obs. 58.56 10.43 3.41 7.76 19.60
sp3 Carbon Protecting Groups The compounds of the invention can be prepared by any of a number of procedures known to those skilled in the art.
For example, the thioether compounds can be prepared by the treatment of a suitable alkyl halide with a thiol. The thioacetal and dithioacetal compounds can be prepared by the treatment of suitable aldehydes and ketones with a thiol. The compounds capable of undergoing heterolytic β-ehmmation can be prepared via nucleophihc addition of a thiol onto a suitable activated olefin in a Michael-type addition reaction.
The following non-hmitmg examples illustrate exemplary methods of preparing a few compounds of the invention.
EXAMPLE 15
1 -NaphthalenesuIfonam.de, 5-(dimethylaminoVN-f2-ff2-(methvI-sulfonv*)ethyl] thiolethyll-
Figure imgf000084_0001
To a stirred suspension of 2-(methylsulfonyl)ethanethιol (17.5 g, 0.12 mol) and 5- (dimethylammo)-N-(2-bromoethyl)-l-naphthalenesulfonamide (43.8 g, 0.12 mol) m acetone (1 8 L) was added anhydrous potassium carbonate (19.6 g, 0.142 mol) at room temperature under argon. The reaction mixture was refluxed for 1 h, then additional potassium carbonate (58.5 g, 0.42 mol) and acetone (50 mL) were added followed by continued reflux for 1.5 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, then poured into stirred water (8 L) and extracted with EtOAc (2 x 4 L). The combined EtOAc extracts were washed with water (1 x 4 L) then washed with bnne (1 x 4 L) and dπed over magnesium sulfate. The clear EtOAc extract was concentrated to give crude product. The crude product was chromatographed on silica gel (2.2 kg) with EtOAc:hexanes 1 :1 (12 L) and 4:1 (8L). Appropπate fractions were combined, filtered and concentrated to give 47.6 g (93.7 % yield) of product as a viscous oil. Proton NMR and LR spectra were consistent with the proposed structure. Elemental analysis: C H N S
Calc 49.01 5.81 6.72 23.09
Calc* 49 34 6.01 6.32 21.71
Obs. 49.52 5.98 6 41 21.96
*Calc. for CI7H24N204S3 . 0.3 EtOAc
EXAMPLE 16
Methvl 3-(Hexadecvlthio propanoate
Reaction Sequence:
O O
II
CH3(CH25SH + CH2=CHCOCH3 CH3(CH2)15SCH2CH2COCH3
Hexadecyl mercaptan (95%, 180 g, 661 mmol) was added, dropwise over 0.5 h, to a stirred mixture of methyl acrylate (60.0 g, 697 mmol) and benzyltnmethylammonium hydroxide (40 wt.% in methanol, 400 mg, 1.0 mmol). The resulting warm (~60°C) solution was stirred for one additional hour then volatiles were removed m vacuo at 90°C. The resulting oil was recrystallized from warm (~40°C) hexanes (500 ml), cooled to -30°C, collected by filtration and dned to constant weight in vacuo at room temperature to give 222.3 g (98%) of punfied product; mp, 38-39°C (corrected). Elemental analysis: C H S
Calc. 69.71 11.70 9.30;
Found 69.78 11.54 9.26. The Η NMR and LR agree with the proposed structure.
EXAMPLE 17 4-ffHexadecv*thio methyll-N.N-dimethv*benzenamine
Reaction Sequence: a 07N
Figure imgf000086_0001
+ Fe/NFLjCl
Figure imgf000086_0002
NaHCO
+ (CH30)2S02 (CH3)2N S(CH2)15CH3
THF/H20 ~\_)-CH2
4- [(Hexadec ylthιo)methyl 1 - 1 -nitrobenzene ( \) :
A solution of 4-mtrobenzyl bromide in ethanol (150.0 g, 0.694 mol in 1.5 L) was brought to reflux Separately, a solution of 1 -hexadecanethiol in ethanol (231 mL, 0.691 mol in 1.5 L) was treated with sodium ethoxide in ethanol (258 mL, 0.691 mol of a 21% solution) over ten minutes, stirred at room temperature for 15 minutes, then warmed to dissolve the precipitate. This was then added to the benzyl bromide solution over twenty minutes, stirred at room temperature for two hours, then allowed to sit undisturbed overnight. The crystallized thioether was collected and combined with the product from a 230 mmol run. This light yellow solid was dissolved in CH2C12 (3 L), washed with water (1 L), then dned (Na2S04), filtered, and spm-evaporated to give 324.5 g of I (89.5% yield). The matenal was a single spot by TLC (19:1 hexanes/EtOAc), and was suitable for further transformation. 4-[(Hexadecylthιo)methyl]benzeneamme (2):
Ammonium chlonde (152.9 g, 2.858 mol), 1 (225.0 g, 0.572 mol), water (2.8 L), methanol (3.8 L) were combined and mechanically stirred at 50°C, then powdered iron (95.9 g, 1.715 mol) was added portionwise over ten minutes. The suspension was vigorously stirred at reflux for 2.5 hours, then hot filtered through a cehte pad. The pad was nnsed with water (3 x 700 mL) and CH2C12 (5 x 700 mL). The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2C12 (3 1 L), then concentrated to remove methanol and again extracted with CH2C12 (3 x 500 ml). The combined orga cs were washed with water (2 x 3L), dπed (Na2S04), filtered, and spm-evaporated to give 198.1 g (95.3% yield) of 2 as a pale yellow solid. TLC (7: 1 hexanes/EtOAc) indicated a single spot. This lot was combined with that of a 100 mmol run to give a total of 231 g of 2 (94.3% yield) which was suitable for further transformation. 4-[(Hexadecylthιo methyl1-N,N-dιmethylbenzeneamιne (3V A solution of sodium bicarbonate in water (168 g, 2.0 mol in 1.3 L) was added to a vigorously stirred solution of 2 in THF (181 g, 0.5 mol m 1.5 L), under argon, at OoC. Dimethyl sulfate (165 mL, 1.75 mol) was added dropwise over 30 minutes, and stirring was continued for a total of 20 h. The ice bath was removed after the first hour. The reaction was followed by TLC (9: 1 hexanes/EtOAc), and initially showed mono-methylated material at Rf = 0.56. After 20 h, concentrated NH4OH (300 mL) was added and stirred for 15 minutes, then EtOAc and bnne (1 L each) were added and the layers were separated. The aqueous portion was saturated with solid NaCl, extracted with EtOAc (5 x 500 mL), and discarded. The combined organics were washed with bnne (500 mL), dned (Na2S04), and spm-evaporated to a yellow oil. A similar reaction was done previously on 137.7 mmol of 2. The combined lots were dissolved in CH2C12, then eluted from a silica gel pad with CH C12. The eluent was spin-evaporated to give 160.1 g of 3 as an oil, which was purified by chromatography (1.8 kg Sι02 eluted with 39: 1 hexanes/EtOAc) to give 91.1 g of 3. This material was recrystalhzed from ethanol containing 1 % water, then dπed in vacuo at room temperature to give 57.9 g (23.3% yield) of pure 3; m.p. 41-43°C. Elemental analysis: C H N S
Calc. 76.66 11.58 3.57, 8.19; Found 76.37 11.63 3.61 8.43. The Η NMR, 13C NMR, and LR agree with the proposed structure.
EXAMPLE 18
1,3,5-Cvcloheptatriene, 7-fhexadecv'thio)-
Tropyhum tetrafluoroborate (10.0 g, 0.056 mol) was ground and placed m a reaction flask with MeOH (100.0 mL). This suspension was stirred under argon for 10 mm at room temperature, and then n-hexadecanefhiol, (90%) (15.0 g, 0.052 mol) was added over 5 mm. The reaction mixture (suspension) was stirred for 2 h. At this point, TLC showed only a small amount of unreacted thiol. To the reaction mixture was added NaHC03 (8 g, 0.095 mol) followed by stimng for 15 min. and filtration through a small pad of silica gel (-20 g) with elution by hexanes (200 mL). The solution was evaporated (bath temp ~30°C) to give an oil which was punfied by column chromatography with silica gel (100 g) elutmg with hexanes to give 17.2 g (95%) as a colorless oil. Additional reactions were performed to give a total of 58.1 g of target compound. Proton NMR and LR spectra were consistent with the proposed structure. Elemental analysis: C H S
Calc. 79.24 11.56 9.20 Obs. 78.63 11.85 9 43
Metal Based Protecting Groups
The metal mercaptides of the present invention can be prepared by a number of methods known to those who are skilled m the art.
R-S-Met-Xn can be made by reactions of the type:
Met(OA')n+1 + RS" ► RSMet(OA')n + OA1 " e.g., for Ti and Zr.
R-S-Met(M)mXn can be made by reactions of the type: Met(M)mXn+ 1 + RS" »► RSMet(M)mXn + Xn "
Figure imgf000088_0001
Furthermore, metal mercaptides of the present invention can be made via the addition of the cosmetic thiol to a solution of salts of heavy metals. This can be accomplished by adding the thiol to an aqueous, hydroalcoholic or alcoholic solution of a salt of the metal. The formed mercaptides of the heavy metals may then precipitate. The precipitated mercaptide can then be filtered and washed with an aqueous, hydro-alcoholic or alcoholic solution containing some of the thiol to prevent hydrolysis [E. Reid, Organic Chemistry of Bivalent Sulfur, Volume I, 1958].
Non-metal and metalloid based Protecting Groups
Thiol denvatives of non-metals and metalloids can be prepared from their hahdes in the presence of a hydrogen halide acceptor hydrogen halide acceptor or by using a metal thiolate, such as lead, where Et represents an ethyl group, Pb is lead, and the other symbols are as defined above [M. E. Peach, "Thiols as Nucleophiles", m The Chemistry of the Thiol Group, 1974, John Wiley and Sons, pp. 747.]:
E- Hal + RSH + Et3N >■ E— S- R + Et3NH+ Hal"
E- Hal + Pb(SR)2 »- E— S— R + PbHal2
Energy Sensitive Protecting Groups
I. 2-Nιtrobenzyl denvatives
The 2-nιtrobenzyl denvatives can be prepared by reaction of the corresponding 2- nitrobenzyl hahde with a thiol m the presence of a base:
Figure imgf000089_0001
IL 2-Nιtrobenzyloxycarbonyl Denvatives
The 2-mtrobenzyloxycarbonyl denvatives can be prepared by the reaction of phosgene with the corresponding alcohol, i.e., 2-nιtrobenzyl alcohol, 6-nιtroveratryl alcohol, 2-nιtrobenzhydrol, and 2,2'-dιmtrodιphenylmethanol. The resulting acyl chloride can then be reacted with a thiol to yield the corresponding 2-nιtrobenzyloxycarbonyl derivative:
Figure imgf000089_0002
where Z1 and Z2 are H, or OCH3 and Z3 is H, C6H5 or o-02N-C6H4.
iπ. Benzyloxycarbonyl Denvatives
The 3,5-dιmethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl group can be introduced by reacting 3,5- dimethoxybenzyl j9-nιtrophenyl carbonate with a thiol:
Figure imgf000089_0003
IV. α.α-Dimethylbenzyloxycarbonyl Denvatives
The α,α-dιmethyl-3,5-dιmethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl compounds can be prepared by the reaction of α,α-dιmethyl-3,5-dιmethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl azide with a thiol:
Figure imgf000089_0004
V 3 -Nitrophenyloxycarbonyl Derivatives
The 3 -nitrophenyloxycarbonyl compound can be prepared by reaction of 3- mtrophenol with phosgene to yield 3 -nitrophenyloxycarbonyl chloride The latter can then be reacted with a thiol
Figure imgf000090_0001
VI Phenacyl Denvatives
The 4-methoxyphenacyl compound can be prepared by reaction of phenacyl bromide with a thiol:
Figure imgf000090_0002
The α-methylphenacyl compound can be prepared by reaction of alpha-methylphenacyl bromide with a thiol:
Figure imgf000090_0003
VII tert-Butyloxycarbonyl Denvatives
The tert-butyloxycarbonyl compound can be prepared by reaction of tert-butyloxycarbonyl chlonde with a thiol:
CH3 O CH3 O
I II RSH I II
CH3— C-O-C-Cl » CH3— C-O-C-S-R
1 1
CH3 CH3
EXAMPLES OF PREFERRED MODIFIED COSMETICALLY ACTIVE AGENTS
The following are non-hmitmg examples of preferred cosmetically active functional group, R. and "hook" combinations for use in topical formulas:
EXAMPLE 19
Figure imgf000091_0001
EXAMPLE 20
Figure imgf000091_0002
EXAMPLE 21
Figure imgf000091_0003
EXAMPLE 22
Figure imgf000092_0001
EXAMPLE 23
Modified Silicone
Figure imgf000092_0002
x = 2 to 500
EXAMPLE 24
Modified Silicone
Figure imgf000092_0003
y=l to 100 x = 2 to 500 EXAMPLE 25
Modified Anti-oxidant
Figure imgf000093_0001
EXAMPLE 26
Modified Perfluoro Conditioner
Figure imgf000093_0002
EXAMPLE 27
Modified UV Absorber
Figure imgf000093_0003
EXAMPLE 28
Modified Anti-oxidant
Figure imgf000094_0001
EXAMPLE 29
Modified Conditioner
CH3(CH2)i5(OCH2CH2 6S-
Br"
wherein Linker represents any straight, branched or mono- or polycyclic aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms, especially O, N, S, P, Si, and can incorporate one or more substituents including, but not limited to, poly or perfluoro substitution.
These compounds are made by synthesis methods known in the art, including but not limited to those descnbed above and those descnbed m Sokolowska-Gaida, J. and Freeman, H., Dyes and Pigments (1990) Vol. 14, pp. 35-48, European Patent Application EP 0437099 Al Published by Dow Coming Corp. (Inventors: Halloran, D. J., et al.) and the preparation section herein.
EXAMPLE 30
"Terminal" benzylchloride-substituted silicone polymer.
The hydnde terminated silicone polymer HMe Sι-(OSιMe:)-OSιMeΗ (35 g, 53 56 mmol. Gelest) was weighed into a 250 mL round bottom flask containing a stir bar 2,6-dι-tert-butylphenol (26 mg, 489 ppm by weight) was added followed by 51 ppm platinum in the form of Karstedt's catalyst (GE Silicones Product, 10 2% platinum by weight) The pale vellow solution was placed m a 50°C oil bath Vinylbenzylchloπde (16 8 mL, 1 19.2 mmol, Aldrich) w as added slowly dropwise by syπnge with stirring The solution quickly became cloudy yellow and remained that way until about one mmute after the addition was complete. At this time the reaction mixture turned dark brown. The mixture was stirred at 52°C for 1 5 hours after the addition was complete. The brown mixture was then washed with methanol (1/3 by volume) two times to remove excess vinylbenzylchloπde. The product, a cloudy brown oil, was isolated after drying under vacuum m 83 5 % yield (42.89 g, 44 74 mmol). Η NMR (acetone- dt) 7 33 (pseudo t, J = 8.0 Hz, aryl). 7.23 (pseudo d, J = 8.0 Hz, aryl), 7 13 (pseudo d, J = 8.2 Hz. aryl). 4.66 (s, 4H, CH.C1), 2 70 (m, 2.4H, SιCH CH_Ar), 2.27 (q, J = 7.6 Hz, 0.8H, SιCH(Me)Ar), 1.38 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 2.4H, SιCH(Me)Ar), 0 94 (m, 2.4H, SιCH_CH:Ar), 0.12 (s, 54H, SiMe) The aryl resonances integrate to be 8H total. This product is cloudy brown due to the presence of colloidal platinum. Alternatively, we have found that a very pale yellow product, identical by ' H NMR spectroscopy, can be isolated when the material (mixture of hydrosilation isomers) is prepared using the heterogeneous catalyst Pt Λl203 (5% Pt). Also noteworthy is the fact that with higher molecular weight silicones, it is possible and recommended to use larger amounts of methanol in the washing step. See Scheme 1. Pyndmium-substituted silicone polymer.
Inside a helium filled dry box, 42.89 g (44.74 mmol) of the ''terminal" benzylchloπde- substituted silicone polymer was added to a 250 mL round bottom flask containing a stir bar. To this was added 10 mL acetone (dned over dnente) and 35 mL anhydrous acetomtnle. Sodium iodide (13.45 g, 89.73 mmol, dned under vacuum at 1 10°C) was added slowly as a solid to the amber solution while sodium chlonde quickly precipitated. The Nal addition was followed by 1 - methyl-5-(tπfluoromethyl)-2(lH)-pyndmethιone (17.30 g, 89.55 mmol, prepared by Starks Associates, Buffalo, NY), added piecewise as a solid. The orange mixture was allowed to stir at room temperature for 3 days. Outside the drybox, the mixture was filtered, and the volatile matenals were then removed from the solution under vacuum. The crude product was dissolved in a minimum amount of acetone (about 75 mL) forming a dark orange solution. Pentane (250 mL) was added to precipitate the product which was filtered on a frit and washed with pentane (5 x 50 mL). The product was isolated in 88% yield (59 g) as a yellow powder. Η NMR (acetone- d ): 9.73 (s, 2H, pyH), 8.73 (m, 4H, pyH), 7.56 (pseudo t, J = 8 Hz, phenyl), 7 29 (pseudo d, J = 8Hz, phenyl), 7.20 (pseudo d, J = 8Hz, phenyl), (the three phenyl resonances integrate to 8H total), 5.03 (s, 4H, CH2S), 4.49 (s, 6H, NMe), 2.71 (m, 2.4H, SιCH2CH2Ar), 2.29 (q, J = 7.4 Hz, 0.8H, SiCH(Me)Ar), 1.39 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 2.4H. SιCH(Me)Ar), 0.94 (m, 2.4H, SιCH2CH2Ar), 0.12 (s, 54H, SiMe). See Scheme 1.
Figure imgf000096_0001
88.3% yield + product of α- yellow powder hydrosilation
EXAMPLE 31
"On-chain" benzylchloride-substituted silicone polymer.
The "on-chain" hydride silicone polymer Me3Si-(OSiMe2)2r(OSiHMe)3-OSiMe:. (200 g, 102.0 mmol, GE Silicones Product) was weighed into a 250 mL round bottom flask containing a stir bar. To this was first added 2,6-di-tert-butylphenol (128 mg, 504 ppm by weight) and then 150 ppm platinum in the form of the heterogeneous catalyst Pt/Al203 (5% Pt by weight). The pale yellow solution was placed in a 50°C oil bath and vinylbenzylchloride (50.1 mL, 355.3 mmol, Aldrich) was added by syringe with stirring. The mixture was stirred at 60°C for 4 days. The dark yellow-green reaction mixture was then washed with methanol (1/2 by volume) three times to remove excess vinylbenzylchloride. The product, a clear yellow oil, was isolated in 79.0 % yield after drying under vacuum (194.99 g, 80.64 mmol). Η NMR (acetone- dή): 7.33 (pseudo t, J = 7.8 Hz, 6 H, aryl), 7.21 (m, 6 H, aryl). 4 65 (s, 6.0 H, C H C1), 2.73 (m, 4H, SiC ILCI LAr), 2 23 (m, IH, SιCH(Me)Ar), 1.40 (m, 3H. SιCH(Me)Ar), 0.93 (m, 4H, SiC- l.CH.Ar), 0.12 (s, 154H, SiMe). The aryl resonances integrate to be 12H total. The final product showed some solubility m methanol so smaller amounts may be recommended m the washing step Significantly lower reaction times (ca 1-2 hours) are needed when the heterogeneous catalyst is replaced with Karstedt' s catalyst, particularly for on-chain substituted hydndes. or when the described reaction is heated to a higher temperature See Scheme 2. Pyrimidinium-substituted silicone polymer.
This "on-chain" benzylchlonde-substituted silicone polymer (31.32 g, 12 95 mmol) was added to a 250 mL round bottom flask containing a stir bar mside a helium-filled dry box. To this was added 20 mL acetone (dπed over dnente) and sodium iodide (5.46 g, 36 39 mmol, dned under vacuum at 1 10°C) as a solid. The solution became cloudy and quickly precipitated sodium chloride. Another 10 mL of acetone was added followed by 4 49 g (35.58 mmol) of the 2(1H)- pynmidinethione (prepared by Starks Associates, Buffalo, NY), added piecewise as a solid. The orange mixture was allowed to stir overnight (approximately 16 hrs.) at room temperature. Outside the dry box, the precipitate was removed and the volatile materials evaporated under vacuum. The product was isolated m 97.3% yield (35.43 g) as a waxy, dark orange solid. Η NMR (acetone-d6): 9.72 (s, 3 H, pyH), 9.39 (m, 3 H, pyH), 8.02 (pseudo t, J = 4.8 Hz, 3 H, pyH), 7 48 (pseudo d, J = 6.7 Hz, 6H, phenyl), 7.22 (m, 6H, phenyl), 4.82 (s, 6.3 H, CH S), 4.34 (s, 9 0 H, NMe), 2.72 (m, 4H, SιCH2CH2Ar), 2.20 (q, J = 7.4 Hz, IH, SιCH(Me)Ar), 1.39 (m, 3H, SιCH(Me)Ar), 0.92 (m, 4H, SιCH2CH2Ar), 0.12 (s, 154 H, SiMe). Further studies revealed that the reaction with the pynmidme thione can be performed under air with solvent used as received with the same results. See Scheme 2. The distribution of the on-cham substitution is random, not blocked as depicted schematically. However, the invention is not limited to randomly distributed polymer.
S
-Si4
Figure imgf000098_0001
EXA 32-38
Other pyrimidinium-substituted silicone polymers.
A number of other hook-functionalized silicone polymers were prepared. Vinyl benzylchloride hydrosilation reactions were performed as described in both Examples 1 and 2 while the method used to prepare the pyrimidinium-substituted materials was as described in the second part of Example 2. The new materials synthesized are shown as follows:
Figure imgf000099_0001
Figure imgf000100_0001
EXAMPLE 39 Benzylchloride-substituted silicone resin.
The hydnde substituted silicone resm MH2Q (101 05g, 0.932 mol Si-H) was weighed into a 500 mL round-bottom flask containing a stir bar. 2,6-di-tert-butylphenol (61 0 mg, 529 ppm by weight) was added followed by 37 6 ppm of platinum m the form of Karstedt's catalyst (GE Silicones Product 89023, 10 0% platinum by weight) The mixmre was placed m a 55°C oil bath and vinylbenzylchloπde (14 30 g, 93.7 mmol, Aldnch) was added dropwise over a penod of one hour. At the end of the addition, the solution went from clear yellow to cloudy yellow. The mixture was stirred at 55°C for 17 hours and then at 95°C for four hours to complete the reaction as determined by Η NMR spectroscopy The mixture was transferred to a 500-mL three-necked round-bottom flask which was placed m a hot oil bath. The internal temperamre was raised to 120°C and 1-hexene (150 mL) was added dropwise over the course of about three hours. The mixture was stirred for an additional 16 hours, however, the temperature dropped due to excess 1-hexene and this hindered the reaction. The excess 1-hexene was removed under vacuum. The reaction was set up again, this time with a slower addition of 1- hexene at 120°C. After a total of 3 days of reaction time, which includes the previous removal step, the final product, a cloudy dark brown liquid, was isolated m 94 8% yield (176.18 g) Η NMR (acetone-d,,) 7.32 (m, phenyl), 7 24 (pseudo d, J = 5 5 Hz, phenyl), 7 16 (m, phenyl), 4 65 (s, Ar( II2Cl), 2.73 (m, SιCH(Me)Ar). 2 03 (s, SιCH(Me)Ar), 1.31 (br m, SiCI LC ILAr and hexvl). 0 88 (br m, hexyl), 0.65 (br m, hexyl), 0 18 (br m, SiCH.CH.Ar and hexyl), -0 24 (br s, SiMe) Shorter reaction times are required if the temperature of the reaction with 1-hexene is maintained at 120°C. Pyrimidinium-substituted silicone resin.
The benzylchloπde-functionahzed resm was converted to the pynmidmium substituted material as descnbed in Example 3 1. The product was isolated in 87.8% yield (25.9 g) as a viscous dark orange liquid. Hair care benefits.
In order to measure hair care benefits imparted by the new silicone mateπals, treated hair switches (4 grams) were contacted with formulations containing the pynmidimum-substiiuied silicone polymer described in Example 3 1 which is referred to as the "3Hook Polymer". Following treatment and simulated consumer use, combing forces were measured using a Reed Combing Machine.
The study of combining forces showed that hair switches treated with the hook-substituted silicone polymer consistently exhibited lower combing forces than the controls. The sample which did contain the hook silicone polymer demonstrated combining benefits over the sample which did not contain the hook silicone polymer. Combing benefits are also evident in the samples containing the 3Hook Polymer compared with the analogous samples which contained PDMS (polydimethylsiloxane, 5 centistokes, 5% by weight) as a control
3Hook Polymer:
Figure imgf000101_0001
Overall, use of the 3Hook Polymer m the hair treatment formulation clearly led to wet combing benefits whether or not conditioner was used. Wet combing benefits were found when the hair was treated once and them subjected to four simulated weeks of shampooing. The combing benefit imparted to hair treated only once was just as profound as that found for hair that was treated weekly with the hook silicone polymer. In addition, the benefit imparted to the hair by the 3Hook polymer was durable, lasting through at least 16 shampoos. While typical embodiments have been set forth for the purpose of illustration, the foregoing descriptions should not be deemed to be a limitation on the scope of the invention Accordingly, various modifications, adaptations, and alternatives may occur to one skilled in the art without departing from the spint and scope of the present invention
METHODS OF USLNG THE PROTECTED THIOL COMPOUNDS OF THE PRESENT INVENTION
The method of use of the various protected thiol compounds is dependent on the product form utilized. The use would be as typically used for the product chosen.
The protected thiol compound of the present invention can be used in a vanety of ways m hair care compositions. For example, in the most basic sense the cosmetic actives of the present invention can be applied directly to the hair m a alcohol/solvent/water solution compnsing:
Protected thiol cosmetic active of Examples 1-20. 30, 31 , 39 0.5 to 10%
Hydroalcoholic solvent 0 to 95.00% pH modifier, i.e , NaOH or citric acid pH 3 to 10*
Water Q.S.
* Note, the pH will vary based on the particular "hook" compound of use and can be adjusted either just pnor to treatment with hair or simultaneously with the treatment of hair.
After application, the hair is washed or nnsed to remove excess solvent. The resulting protected thiol cosmetic active will be delivered and bound to the hair permanently, e.g benefit will last beyond 40 to 80 or more shampoos.
A simple non-hmiting dye composition using the protected thiol compounds of the present invention compnses the following composition ranges (depending on what colour is desired): Modified D&C Violet No. 2 of Example 21 0.00% to 3.00%
Modified D&C Red No. 31 of Example 19 0.00% to 3.00%
Modified D&C Yellow No. 6 of Example 20 0.00% to 3.00%
Modified D&C Black No. 9 of Example 18 0.00% to 3.00%
2-propanol 50.00%
Sodium Hydroxide to pH 9- 10
Water Q.S. wherem the total dye concentration is between 1% and 5%. The preparation of this composition and treatment with hair for proof of performance is descnbed as follows: The dyes are added to the water and 2-propanol solution in a jar and stirred until thoroughly dissolved at room temperature. The hair to be treated is submerged into the solution such that the hair weight comprises 10 to 40 wt% of the composition. The sodium hydroxide is then added, a cap is placed on the jar and the jar containing the solution plus hair is shaken for five minutes. The hair is then removed from the ar and nnsed thoroughly.
A simple non-hmitmg conditioning composition using a protected thiol compound of the present invention compnses:
The Modified Silicone of Example 23 5.00%
Methanol 90.00%
NaOH to pH 8-10
Water Q.S.
The preparation of this composition and treatment with hair for proof of performance is descnbed as follows: The modified silicone is added to the methanol m a jar and stirred until thoroughly dissolved at 100°F. The water and NaOH is then added with stirnng until the solution is thoroughly mixed. With a synnge, one gram of the resulting solution is applied per gram of the hair to be treated. The applied solution is then worked through the hair while weanng rubber gloves. The hair is then covered with plastic wrap and let sit for up to two hours. The hair is then nnsed thoroughly.
The protected thiol compounds can be achieved with any of the protected hooks descnbed herein. Of course, the protected thiol compounds of the present inventions can be applied in diffenng matnces and formulas as descnbed previously herein.
The protected thiol compounds may also be added to technologies currently well known in the art to treat substrates such as hair, teeth, finger nails, textiles, and animal fur. Nonlimiting examples of such compositions are descnbed m the references below, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety:
Shampoos - U.S. Patent No. RE 34,584 (Grote et al.) issued Apπl 12, 1994; U.S. Patent No. 4,345,080 (Bohch) issued August 17, 1982; U.S. Patent No. 4,379,753 (Bohch) issued Apnl 12, 1983; and U.S. Patent No. 4,705,681 (Maes et al.) issued November 10, 1987 Hair conditioners - U.S. Patent No. 4,387,090 (Bohch) issued June 7, 1983; U.S. Patent No. 5,674,478 (Dodd et al.) issued October 7, 1997; and U.S. Patent No. 5,750,122 (Evans et al.) issued May 12, 1998.
Hair styling compositions - U.S. Patent No. 5,166,276 (Hayama et al.) issued November 24, 1992; U.S. Patent No. 5,565,193 (Midha et al.) October 15, 1996; and U.S. Patent No. 5,658,557 (Bohch et al.) issued August 19, 1997. Hair coloring compositions - U.S. Patent No 4,197,865 (Jacquet et al.) issued April 15, 1980, U S. Patent No. 4,125,367 (Bugaut et al.) issued November 14, 1978, U.S. Patent No. 5,114,429 (Jumno et al.) issued May 19,1992, and U.S. Patent No. 5,279,620 (Jumno et al.) issued January 18, 1994.
Mascara compositions - Commonly assigned U.S. Patent Application Serial Nos. 08/951,285 (Alwatarπ et al), filed October 16, 1997, (Attorney's Docket 6345C); 08/757,538 (Bartholomey et al.), filed November 27, 1996 (Attorney's Docket 6397); and 09/121,138 (Alwatarπ et al.), filed July 23, 1998 (Attorney's Docket 5654C2); and m PCT Application Nos. US96/04154, published October 31, 1996; US97/19786, published May 7, 1998; and US97/21890, published June 4, 1998.
Nail polish and nail polish subcoat compositions - U.S. Patent 4,179,304 (Rossomando) issued December 18, 1979, U.S. Patent 5,538,717 (LaPoteπe) issued July 23, 1996, and U.S. Patent 5,639,447 (Patel) issued June 17, 1997, U.S. Patent 5,567,428 (Hughes) issued October 22, 1996. Toothpaste compositions - U.S. Patent 4,254,101(Denny) issued March 3, 1981, and U.S. Patent 4,314,990 (Denny et al.) issued February 9, 1982, and PCT Application No. WO 96/15767 (Unilever PLC) published May 30, 1996. Textile dye and treatment compositions -
Other typical compositions are found m Cosmetic and Toiletry Formulations, 2nd Ed, Flick, E. W., Noyes Publications (N.J.), Harry's Cosmeticologv, 7th Ed., Harry, R.G., Wilkinson, J.B., and Moore R.J., Chemical Pub. Co. (NY) (1982); and Cosmetics. Science and Technology. 2nd Ed., Balsam, M.S. and Sagann, E.S., Wiley- nterscience (NY) (1972) (3 volumes).
Other embodiments of the present invention compnse a system compnsing a topical composition containing the protected thiol compound and an activating mechanism. For example the conditioner composition: EXAMPLE 40
Pyπdmium, l-methyl-2-[(hexadecyl)thιo]-, bromide 3.00%
Urea 10.00%
Cocoarmdopropyl Betame 0.80% isopropanol 50.00%
Water Q.S. can be applied simultaneously with a 5% solution of thioglycohc acid. A preferred embodiment is a kit wherem the dye solution and the thioglycohc acid are packaged in separate chambers of a dual chamber package and delivered simultaneously from the package.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1 A topical composition for treating amino acid based substrates comprising a protected thiol compound having the formula
R— (S— Pr)m where R is a mono or multivalent cosmetically active functional group, S is sulfur, Pr is a protecting group and m is an integer between 1 and 100.
2 A topical composition according to Claim 1, wherem the functional group, R, is selected from the group consisting of antimicrobial compounds, UV-absorbmg compounds, skm conditioning agents, hair conditioning agents, hair repair agents, hair styling agents, hair dyes, scalp treatment agents, anti-mflammatory compounds, antioxidants, colonng agents, perfumes, oral care actives, skin moistunzers, pharmaceutical agents, antidandruff agents, insect repellents, moistunzers, humectants, pearlescent and/or opacifymg matenals, fabnc care actives, pet grooming actives, fabnc anti-wnnklmg agents, shπnk-resistant actives, laundry care actives, hard surfaces actives, textile actives, textile dyes, water-proofing agents, cationic polymers, cationic surface modifiers, hydrophobic surface modifiers, anionic surface modifiers, absorbents, antifungal agents, insecticidal agents, textile color guards, nail actives such as enamel and polish, eyelash actives and mascara, antiperspirant and deodorant actives, anti-acne actives, odor control actives, fluorescent actives, bleaching agents, enzymes, antibodies, dispersing aids, emollients, stabilizers, anti-static agents, anti-seborrhea agents, bπghteners, fluorescent dyes, softeners, cross-linkers, and mixtures thereof.
3. A topical composition according to any of the previous claims, wherem the protecting group is selected from the group consisting hetercychc protecting groups, sp2 aliphatic trigonal carbon protecting groups, sp3 carbon electrophihc protecting groups, metal based protecting groups, non-metaloid based protecting groups, energy-sensitive protecting groups and mixtures thereof.
4. A topical composition according to any of the previous claims, wherem the protecting group is a heterocyclic protecting group selected from the group consisting of mono- or polyunsaturated or saturated heterocylic nngs, heterocyclic nng systems, fused heterocyclic nng systems, substituted heterocyclic nngs, substituted heterocyclic nng systems, substituted fused heterocyclic nng systems, and mixtures thereof.
5 A topical composition according to any of the previous claims, wherem the heterocyclic protecting group is selected from the group consisting of six membered heterocycles with one, two, three or four heteroatoms, six membered heterocychcs containing O, N, or S with C=0, C=S or C=C exocyclic groups, cationic six membered heterocycles with one or two heteroatoms, five membered heterocycles with one, two, or three heteroatoms, cationic, five membered heterocycles with two or more heteroatoms, seven membered heterocycles, cationic seven membered heterocycles, combinations of heterocycles in a ring system and a fused system both of which may include carbocyhc nngs without heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
6. A topical composition according to any of the previous claims, wherein the protected thiol compound is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000106_0001
Figure imgf000107_0001
\
Figure imgf000107_0002
and mixtures thereof, wherein Hal" is Cl", Br", I" or any suitable negatively charged countenon.
7. A topical composition according to any of the previous claims, wherein the protected thiol compound is selected from the group consistmg of
CH3
Figure imgf000107_0003
Figure imgf000108_0001
Figure imgf000108_0002
and mixtures thereof.
8 A topical composition according to Claim 3, wherem the protecting group is an sp2 aliphatic tngonal carbon group such that the protected thiol compound has the formula selected from the group consisting of
M1 M1 M1
11 1 11 1 Λ ι 1 "
R— Nu— C— X R— S— C— E±-Q— S R-E— C— S- -o s
M1 M2 II , 11 ,
R -S— C— E— C-X and mixtures thereof wherein M1, M2 are O, S, NA1, NOA1, NA'A2+, or CA^CA'Y1; E1 is O, S, NA1, CA'A2; or Nu1 is NHAΑ2+, NA'A2, OHA1+, or OA1; and X1 represents an electron withdrawing or electron donating group with a Hammett sigma para value between -1.0 and +1.5 compnsing C-hnked groups of the classes defined below as A1, A2, A3; S-hnked groups including SA1, SCN, S02A', SO3A1, SSA1, SOA1, SONA'A2, SOaNA'A2, SNA1 A2, S(NA:)A2, S(0)(NA1)A2, SA'(NA2); O- hnked groups including OA1, OOA1, OCN, ONA'A2; N-hnked groups including NA!A2, NA'A2A3+, NC, NA'OA2, NVSA2, NCO, NCS, N02, N=NA\ N=NOA', NA'CN, N=C=NA1, NA1NA2A3, NA1NA2NA3A4, NA'N=NA2; other miscellaneous groups including COHal, CON3, CONA' , CONA'COA2, C(=NA' )NA'A\ CHO, CHS, CN, NC, Hal, and derived groups that connect one or more of X1, X2, X3, X4, X3 via a ring system.
9. A topical composition according to Claim 8, wherem the sp2 aliphatic trigonal carbon protecting group-nucleophile moiety is selected from derivatives of thiocarboxylic acid, carbonodithioic acid, carbonothioic acid, carbamothioic acid, dithiocarboxylic acid, carbonotrithioic acid, carbamodithioic acid, carboximidothioic acid, carbonimidodithioic acid, and carbommidothioic acid, and mixtures thereof.
10. A topical composition according to Claim 9 wherem the protected thiol compound is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000109_0001
Figure imgf000109_0002
Figure imgf000109_0003
Figure imgf000109_0004
Figure imgf000110_0001
- C H C Ho C H C H -NH + cr
O
R- -CH, -CHo CH2 NH3 Cl*
Figure imgf000110_0002
CH, -CH, -CH, -CH, -NH, Cl"
Figure imgf000110_0003
and mixtures thereof.
11. A topical composition according to Claim 3, wherein the protecting group is an sp3 carbon electrophihc protecting group such that the nucleophile-protectmg group moiety is selected from the group consisting of monothioacetal groups, monothioketal groups, monothioorthoester groups, monothioorthocarbonate groups, dithioacetal groups, dithioletal groups, dithioorthoester gropus, dithioorthocarbonate groups, tπthioorthoester groups, thiohemiaminal groups, monothioorthoamide groups, dithioorthoamide groups, sp3 carbon groups capable of undergoing heterolytic β-ehmination, and sp3 carbon nng systems, and mixtures thereof.
12. A topical composition according to Claim 11 wherem the protected thiol compound is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000111_0001
Figure imgf000111_0002
Figure imgf000111_0003
Figure imgf000111_0004
H H
-CH, -c- -OCH3 -CH? -c- -NH,
:0
OCH3 NH2
Figure imgf000112_0001
Figure imgf000112_0002
and mixtures thereof.
13. A topical composition according to Claim 3, wherem the protecting group is a metal based protectmg group such that the protected thiol compound has the formula selected from the group consistmg of
Figure imgf000112_0003
and mixtures thereof, wherein Met is an alkaline earth metal, transition metal or a representative metal selected from the group consisting of Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, La, Ti, Zr, V, Cr, Mo, W, Mn, Fe, Co, Rh, Ni, Pd, Pt, Cu, Ag, Au, Zn, In, Sn, and Bi.; where n and m are zero or integers such that 1 + 2m + n equals the valency of Met; X represents independent electron withdrawing, electron neutral or electron donating groups with Hammett sigma para values between -1.0 and +1.5, and M is O, S, NA1 or CA'A2, where A1 and A2 represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cyclic aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, hetoroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms.
14 A topical composition according to Claim 13 wherem the protected thiol compound is selected from the group consisting of
N(CH3)2 o CH2CH3
R-S-Ti-N(CH3)2 R_s- V-S-R R-S— Sn-CH2CH3 I I I
N(CH3)2 S-R CH2CH3
OCH2CH2CH2CH3 S-R
S— T1-OCH2CH2CH2CH3 R— S-Mo-S— R
OCH2CH2CH2CH3 R— S-Ni-S— R S-R
OCH2CH2CH2CH3
R- S— Zr- OCH2CH2CH2CH3 OCH2CH2CH2CH3 and mixtures thereof.
15. A topical composition according to Claim 3, wherem the protecting group is a non-metal or metaloid based protecting group such that the protected thiol compound has the formula selected from the group consisting of
Mm
Figure imgf000113_0001
and mixtures thereof, wherem E is a representative non-metal or metalloid element selected from the group consisting of B, Al, Si, Ge, N, P, S, Se, Sb, and Te; wherein n and m are zero or integers such that 1 + 2m + n equals the valency of E; X represents independent electron withdrawing, electron neutral or electron donating groups with Hammett sigma para values between -1.0 and +1.5, and M is O, S, NA1 or CA'A2, where A1 and A2 represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or a straight, branched or mono- or poly- cyclic aliphatic, mono or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, hetoroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0-15 heteroatoms
16 A topical composition according to Claim 15, wherein the protected thiol compound is selected from the group consisting of
OCH2CH3 CH3 o
R— S— Si-OCH2CH3 R— S— Si-CH3 R— S— S— CH3
1 1 11
OCH2CH3 CH3 o
S— R I
R-S— B— S— R O O R— S— Sb-S— R I II I S-R R— S— Ge-O-Ge-S— R S-R
and mixtures thereof.
17 A topical composition according to Claim 3, wherem the protectmg group is an energy sensitive protecting group selected from the group consisting of 2-Nιtrobenzyl groups, 2- Nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl groups, Benzyloxycarbonyl groups,. α,α-Dιmethylbenzyloxycarbonyl groups, 3 -Nitrophenyloxycarbonyl groups, Phenacyl groups, tert-Butyloxycarbonyl groups, and mixtures thereof.
18. A topical composition according to Claim 17, wherem the protecting group is an energy sensitive protecting group selected from the group consisting of 6-mtroveratryloxycarbonyl, dimethyldimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl, 5-bromo-7-nιtromdohnyl, O- hydroxy-alpha-methyl-cmnamoyl, 2-oxymethylene anthraqumone, and mixtures thereof.
19. A topical composition according to Claim 17, wherein the protected thiol compound is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000115_0001
Figure imgf000115_0002
Figure imgf000115_0003
Figure imgf000115_0004
and mixtures thereof.
20. A system comprising: a) a topical composition according to any of the previous claims; and b) an activating mechanism.
21 A system according to Claim 20, wherem the activating mechanism is a pH modifier
22 A system according to Claim 20, wherem the activating mechanism is water.
23 A system according to Claim 20, wherein the activating mechanism is an energy source
24. A system according to Claim 20, wherein the activating mechanism is a separate nucleophile.
25 A system according to Claim 20, wherem the activating mechanism is pre-reduced hair.
26. A kit compnsing: a) the system according to Claim 21 ; and b) a package compnsing a first and second chamber; wherem the topical composition is packaged m and delivered out of one chamber and the pH modifier is packaged in and delivered out of the second chamber.
27. A hair care composition compnsmg the topical composition according to any of Claims 1 to 19.
28 A hair care composition according to Claim 27 wherein the protected thiol compound compnses from 0.000001% to 30% of the composition.
29. A hair care composition according to Claim 28, wherein the functional group, R, is selected from the group consistmg of hair conditioners, hair styling agents, dyes and colonng agents, sunscreens, fragrances, antidandruff agents, and mixtures thereof.
30. A textile care composition compnsmg the topical composition according to any of Claims 1 to 19.
31. A textile care composition according to Claim 30, wherem the protected thiol compound compnses from 000001% to 30% of the composition.
32 A textile care composition according to Claim 31, wherein the functional group, R, is selected from the group consisting of dyes and coloring agents, odor control actives, sealants, fragrances, and mixtures thereof
33 A cosmetic composition compnsing the topical composition according to any of Claims 1 to 19
34 A cosmetic composition according to Claim 33, wherem the protected thiol compound comprises from 0.000001% to 30% of the composition.
35 A cosmetic composition according to Claim 34, wherein the functional group, R, is selected from the group consisting of dyes and coloring agents, sealants, resms, varnishes, latex finishes, and mixtures thereof.
36 An oral care composition compnsing the topical composition according to any of Claims 1 to 19
37 An oral care composition according to Claim 36, wherem the protected thiol compound comprises from 0.000001% to 30% of the composition.
38 An oral care composition according to Claim 37, wherem the functional group, R, is selected from the group consisting of anti-canes agents, plaque buffers, anti-plaque agents, agents for alleviating sensitive teeth, matenals that form films and block pores, oral pharmaceutical actives, biomolecules, anti-tartar agents, agents for treating bad breath, anti-calculus agents, and mixtures thereof.
39 An animal care composition compnsing the topical composition according to any of Claims 1 to 19
40 An animal care composition according to Claim 39, wherem the protected thiol compound compnses from 0.000001% to 30% of the composition.
41 An animal care composition according to Claim 40, wherein the functional group, R, is selected from the group consisting of antimicrobial agents, insect repellents, grooming actives, and mixtures thereof
42. A method for attaching a functional group to an amino acid based substrate comprising applying the topical composition according to any of Claims 1 to 19 to the amino acid based substrate.
43 A method according to Claim 42 wherem the acid based substrate is selected from the group consistmg of wool, cotton, animal fur, animal skin, human hair, human skm, human nails, and human teeth.
44. A method for attaching a functional group to human hair compnsing applying the hair care composition according to any of Claims 27 to 29 to human hair in need of such treatment.
45 A method for attaching a functional group to textiles compnsing applying the textile care composition according to any of Claims 30 to 32 to textiles in need of such treatment.
46. A method for attaching a functional group to finger nails or eyelashes compnsmg applying the cosmetic composition according to any of Claims 33 to 35 to nails or eyelashes m need of such treatment.
47 A method for attaching a functional group to teeth compnsing applying the oral care composition according to any of Claims 36 to 38 to teeth m need of such treatment.
48. A method for attaching a functional group to animal fur compnsing applying the animal care composition according to any of Claims 39 to 41 to animal fur in need of such treatment.
49. A topical composition which has the improved combined benefits of stability to air and attachment of the cosmetically active functional group to amino acid substrates upon application without pretreatment of the substrate over previously topical compositions.
50. A hair care composition which results in covalent attachement of cosmetically active functional groups to human hair with significantly less damage occurring on the hair.
51. A process for treating hair comprising the step of applying a safe and effective amount of the hair care composition of any of Claims 27 to 29 to human hair in need of treatment and the step of applying a pH modifier to the hair.
52. The process for treating hair according to Claim 51, wherein the step of applying the hair care composition and the step of applying the pH modifier are performed simultaneously.
53. A textile care composition which results in covalent attachment of cosmetically active functional groups to textiles without severe treatment or pretreatment processes.
54. A silicone composition which comprises at least one polysiloxane or silicone resin, at least one linker, and at least one molecular hook.
55. The composition of claim 54 in which the at least one linker is bound to a polysiloxane or silicone resin through a silicon, carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur atom.
56. The composition of claim 55 in which the at least one linker is bound to a polysiloxane or silicone resin through a silicon atom.
57. The composition of claim 54 in which the at least one polysiloxane or silicone resin has the formula:
MaM'bDcD'dTeT'fQg
where the subscripts a, c, d, e, f and g are zero or a positive integer, subject to the limitation that the sum of the subscripts b, d and f is one or greater; where M has the formula:
Rl3Si01/2,
M' has the formula:
(Z-X)R2 2Si01/2, D has the formula:
R Si02/2,
D' has the formula:
(Z-X)R4Si02/2
T has the formula:
R5Si03/2,
T' has the formula:
(Z-X)SiO3 2,
and Q has the formula Siθ4/ , where each R*, R2, R3, R4; R5 JS independently at each occurrence a hydrogen atom, Cι_22 alkyl, Cι.22 alkoxy, C2.22 alkenyl, CM aryl, and C6.22 alkyl- substituted aryl, C6.22 aralkyl, or Cι_22 fluoroalkyl; each Z, independently at each occurrence, is a molecular hook; and each X, independently at each occurrence, is a linker.
58. The composition of claim 57 in which the average number of X-Z moieties on a polysiloxane or silicone resin is between 1 and 100, preferably between 1 and 6, and more preferably between 3 and 6.
59. The composition of claim 57 in which the at least one polysiloxane or silicone resin comprises at least one compound of the following formulas, (I), (LI), (LIT), (X), (XI), or (XII):
Figure imgf000120_0001
Figure imgf000121_0001
Figure imgf000121_0002
Figure imgf000121_0003
Figure imgf000121_0004
wherein each R1 36 is independently at each occurrence a hydrogen atom, C) 22 alkyl, Ci 22 alkoxy, C- 12 alkenyl, C6 14 aryl, and C6 22 alkyl-substituted aryl, C6 22 aralkyl, and 22 fluoroalkyl, Z1 10, independently at each occurrence, is a molecular hook, and X1 I0, independently at each occurrence, is a linker, where "m" in each formula has a value in a range between about 0 and about 13.000, "n" m each formula has a value in a range between about 0 and about 13,000, 'm+n" in each formula has a value in a range between about 1 and about 13,000, "q" has a value of at least one and "p+q" has a value of at least 3
60 The composition in accordance with claim 59, wherem a polysiloxane or silicone resin compnses at least one compound of formulas (I), (II), (III), (X), or (XI), wherem R' 33 is methyl, "m" in each formula has a value m a range between about 1 and about 50, "n" in each formula has a value in a range between about 0 and about 50; and "m+n" in each formula has a value in a range between about 3 and about 70
61 The composition in accordance with claim 59, wherem a polysiloxane or silicone resin compnses at least one compound of formula (XU), where "q" has a value of at least one and "p+q" has a value of 3-6
62 The composition in accordance with claim 57, wherem the linker comprises a -Co alkyl, aryl, or alkylaryl group, or a C1-C50 heteroaryl group containing one or more heteroatoms
63 The composition m accordance with claim 62, wherem the moiety Z-X is prepared by a process which compnses combining a hook with a linker precursor compnsing a linker and a leaving group.
64 The composition m accordance with claim 62, wherein the leaving group is selected from the group consisting of chlonde, bromide, iodide, tosylate, mesylate, phosphate, and cyclic leaving groups containing at least one heteroatom
65 The composition in accordance with claim 64, wherein the leaving group is iodide
66 The composition in accordance with claim 54, wherem the linker compnses at least one moiety of the formula -D-Ar(Y)n - CH - wherem "Ar" comprises an aromatic or heteroaromatic group; "Y" is a C| 2 straight chain, branched, cycloahphatic, or aralkyl group, C6 ]4 aryl group; fluoro, chloro, bromo, lodo, nitro, mtroso, nitπle, trifluoromethyl, tnfluoropropyl, alkyloxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyl. alkylamido, alkyl ether, or aryl ether group; "n" has a value between zero and the number of free valence sites on the aromatic or heteroaromatic nng; "D" compnses a group bound to a polysiloxane or to a silicone resm, said D group comprising a C, 22 straight chain alkyl, branched alkyl, cycloahphatic, or aralkyl group which optionally may contain a functional group, said functional group being bound to D in a pendent position or separating D from the aromatic or heteroaromatic group, or separating D from a polysiloxane or from a silicone resm, or in more than one of these positions, and wherem said functional group compnses carbonyl, alkylcarbonyl, oxycarbonyl, alkyloxycarbonyl, nitnle, amido, alkylamido, trifluoromethyl, chloro, bromo, or fluoro.
67 The composition in accordance with claim 66, wherem the aromatic or heteroaromatic group compnses phenyl, biphenyl, toluyl, naphthyl, pyndyl, qumolyl, tπazinyl, pynmidyl, pyndazmyl, furyl, furoyl, or thienyl.
68. The composition m accordance with claim 66, wherem the linker consists of at least one compound of the formulas (VLH) and (TX) :
Figure imgf000123_0001
Figure imgf000123_0002
69 The composition m accordance w ith claim 57, wherein the molecular hook comprises a heterocyclic pyndimum compound, a heterocyclic tπazinium compound, or a heterocyclic pyπmidinium compound
70 The composition in accordance with claim 69, wherein the molecular hook is at least one member selected from the group consisting of a heterocyclic pyndimum compound (IV), a heterocyclic tnazinium (V), and a heterocyclic pyπmidmium compound (VI)
Figure imgf000124_0001
Figure imgf000124_0002
wherein X is a linker; Y is hydrogen or is selected from electron withdrawing, electron neutral, or electron donating groups with Hammett sigma para values between -1.0 and +1 5 comprising carbon-lmked groups of the classes defined as A1, A2, A3, and A4, S-lmked groups including SA1, SCN, S02A', SO3A1, SSA1, SOA1, S02NAΑ2, SNA'A2, S(NA')A2, SA'(NA2), SONA'A2, O- hnked groups including OA1, OCN, ONA'A2, N-lmked groups including NA'A2, NAΑ2A3
NA'OA2, NA^A2, NCO, NCS, N02, N=NA' , N=NOA', NA'CN, N=C=NA' , NA'NA2A3,
NA'NA2NA3A4, NA'N=NA2; other groups including CONA'2, CONA'COA2, C(=NA')NAΑ2, CHO, CHS, CN, NC, Hal, and denved groups that connect one or more of the optional substituents via a ring system, Hal is fluonne, chlorine, bromine, or iodine; and wherein A, A1, A2. A3, and A4 each represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or polycyclic aliphatic, mono- or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0 to 15 heteroatoms, including oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon and incorporating one or more substituents including poly or perfluoro substitution; and wherein the countenon, Q", is selected from the group consisting of hahdes, borates, phosphates, tosylates, mesylates, and tnflates.
71 A hair care composition compnsing the composition of claim 54.
72 A textile care composition compnsing the composition of claim 54.
73 A cosmetic composition compnsmg the composition of claim 54.
74 An oral care composition compnsing the composition of claim 54.
75. An animal care composition compns g the composition of claim 54.
76. A silicone composition compnsing at least one compound of the formula (LI) :
Figure imgf000125_0001
where each R ' ' is methyl; Z is a pyπmidmium molecular hook of the formula (VI)
Figure imgf000126_0001
wherein Y is hydrogen, A is methyl: Q is iodide; and X is at least one compound of the formulas (VILI) and (TX) :
Figure imgf000126_0002
Figure imgf000126_0003
wherein Z is Z3; and wherein "m has a value in a range between about 15 and about 55; "n" has a value in a range between about 3 and about 6.
77. A silicone composition comprising at least one compound of the formula (I) :
Figure imgf000126_0004
where each R * is methyl; Z '" are each a pyrimidinium molecular hook of the formula (VI)
Figure imgf000127_0001
wherem Y is hydrogen, A is methyl, Q is iodide, and X is at least one compound of the formulas (VUI) and (DC)
Figure imgf000127_0002
Figure imgf000127_0003
wherein Z is Z1 2, and wherem "m+n" has a value m a range between about 18 and about 61
78 A method for making a silicone composition comprising at least one polysiloxane or silicone resm, at least one linker, and at least one molecular hook, which method compnses combining a linker and a molecular hook with a polysiloxane or silicone resm.
79 The method of claim 78 which compnses combining at least one linker with a polysiloxane or silicone resm and subsequently combining said combination with at least one molecular hook
80 The method of claim 78 in which the at least one linker is bound to a polysiloxane or silicone resm through a silicon, carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur atom.
81 The method of claim 80 in which the at least one linker is bound to a polysiloxane or silicone resm through a silicon atom
82. The method of claim 78 in which the at least one polysiloxane or silicone resin compnses at least one compound of the following formulas, (I), (II), (HI), (X), (XI), or (XII):
Figure imgf000128_0001
Figure imgf000128_0002
Figure imgf000128_0003
Figure imgf000128_0004
Figure imgf000128_0005
Figure imgf000129_0001
where each R1"36 is independently at each occurrence a hydrogen atom, Cι_22 alkyl, C 22 alkoxy, C2. 2 alkenyl, C64 aryl, and C6.2 alkyl-substi ted aryl, C6.22 aralkyl, and C,.22 fluoroalkyl; Z1"10, independently at each occurrence, is a molecular hook; and X 0, independently at each occurrence, is a linker; wherein "m" in each formula has a value in a range between about 0 and about 13,000; "n" in each formula has a value in a range between about 0 and about 13,000; "m+n" in each formula has a value in a range between about 1 and about 13,000; "q" has a value of at least one and "p+q" has a value of at least 3.
83. The method of claim 82 in which the average number of X-Z moieties on a polysiloxane or silicone resin is between 1 and 100, preferably between 1 and 6, more preferably between about 3 and about 6.
84. The method of claim 82, wherein the moiety Z-X is prepared by a process which comprises combining a hook with a linker precursor comprising a linker and a leaving group.
85. The method -of claim 84, wherein the leaving group is selected from the group consisting of chloride, bromide, iodide, tosylate, mesylate, phosphate, and cyclic leaving groups containing at least one heteroatom.
86. The method of claim 85, wherein the leaving group is iodide.
87. The method of claim 78, wherein the linker comprises at least one moiety of the formula - D-Ar(Y)n - CH2- wherein "Ar" comprises an aromatic or heteroaromatic group; "Y" is a d.22 straight chain, branched, cycloahphatic, or aralkyl group, C6 14 aryl group, fluoro, chloro, bromo, lodo, nitro, nitroso, nitnle, tnfluoromethyl, tnfluoropropyl, alkyloxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyl, alkylamido, alkyl ether, or aryl ether group, "n" has a value between zero and the number of free valence sites on the aromatic or heteroaromatic ring, "D" compnses a group bound to a polysiloxane or to a silicone resin, said D group compnsmg a 2 straight chain alkyl, branched alkyl, cycloahphatic, or aralkyl group which optionally may contain a functional group, said functional group being bound to D m a pendent position or separating D from the aromatic or heteroaromatic group, or separating D from a polysiloxane or from a silicone resin, or m more than one of these positions, and wherem said functional group compnses carbonyl, alkylcarbonyl, oxycarbonyl, alkyloxycarbonyl, nitnle, amido, alkylamido, tnfluoromethyl, chloro, bromo, or fluoro
88 The method of claim 87, wherem the aromatic or heteroaromatic group compnses phenyl, biphenyl, toluyl, naphthyl, pyπdyl, qumolyl, tnazmyl, pyπmidyl, pyndazmyl, furyl, furoyl, or thienyl.
89 The method of claim 87, wherem the linker consists of at least one compound of the formulas (VIL) and (IX) :
Figure imgf000130_0001
Figure imgf000130_0002
90 The method of claim 82, wherein the molecular hook compnses a heterocyclic pyndimum compound, a heterocyclic tnazinium compound, or a heterocyclic pynrmdinium compound. 91 The method of claim 90, wherein the molecular hook is at least one member selected from the group consisting of a heterocyclic pyndimum compound (IV), a heterocyclic tπazmium (V), and a heterocyclic pyrimidinium compound (VI)
Figure imgf000131_0001
wherem X is a linker; Y is hydrogen or is selected from electron withdrawing, electron neutral, or electron donating groups with Hammett sigma para values between -1.0 and +1 5 comprising carbon-linked groups of the classes defined as A1, A2, A3, and A4; S-hnked groups including SA1, SCN, S02A\ SO3A1, SSA1, SOA1, SO^NA^2, SNA1 A2, S(NA!)A2, SA!(NA2), SONNA2; O- hnked groups including OA1, OCN, ONA!A2; N-lmked groups including NA'A2, NA'A2A3~, NA^A2, NA'SA2, NCO, NCS, N02, N=NA[, N=NOA\ NA'CN, N=C=NA\ NA'NA2A3, NA!NA2NA3A4, NA'N=NA2; other groups including CONA'2, CONA^OA2, C(=NA')NAΑ2, CHO, CHS, CN, NC, Hal, and denved groups that connect one or more of the optional substituents via a ring system; Hal is fluonne, chlonne, bromine, or iodine; and wherein A, A1, A2, A3, and A4 each represent, independently from one another, a monovalent group which can be the cosmetic active group, R, or H or any of the following: a straight, branched or mono- or polycyclic aliphatic, mono- or polyunsaturated alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl, heteroaliphatic or heteroolefinic system including 1 to 30 carbon atoms together with 0 to 15 heteroatoms, including oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon and incorporating one or more substituents including poly or perfluoro substitution; and wherein the counterion, Q", is selected from the group consisting of halides, borates, phosphates, tosylates, mesylates, and triflates.
PCT/US2000/000444 1999-01-08 2000-01-07 Topical compositions comprising protected functional thiols WO2000040210A2 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA002356325A CA2356325C (en) 1999-01-08 2000-01-07 Topical compositions comprising protected functional thiols
BR0007437-3A BR0007437A (en) 1999-01-08 2000-01-07 Topical compositions comprising protected functional thiols
AU26037/00A AU2603700A (en) 1999-01-08 2000-01-07 Topical compositions comprising protected functional thiols
EP00904252A EP1143916A2 (en) 1999-01-08 2000-01-07 Topical compositions comprising protected functional thiols
JP2000591967A JP2002541058A (en) 1999-01-08 2000-01-07 Topical composition containing a protected functional thiol

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11527899P 1999-01-08 1999-01-08
US60/115,278 1999-01-08
US12945399P 1999-04-15 1999-04-15
US60/129,453 1999-04-15

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2000040210A2 true WO2000040210A2 (en) 2000-07-13
WO2000040210A3 WO2000040210A3 (en) 2001-11-29

Family

ID=26813030

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2000/000444 WO2000040210A2 (en) 1999-01-08 2000-01-07 Topical compositions comprising protected functional thiols

Country Status (8)

Country Link
US (1) US6544499B1 (en)
EP (1) EP1143916A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2002541058A (en)
CN (1) CN1433297A (en)
AU (1) AU2603700A (en)
BR (1) BR0007437A (en)
CA (1) CA2356325C (en)
WO (1) WO2000040210A2 (en)

Cited By (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6390102B1 (en) 2000-07-14 2002-05-21 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for personal care products and method for making
WO2002048304A1 (en) * 2000-12-11 2002-06-20 Unilever Plc Textile care composition
US6488921B1 (en) 2000-07-14 2002-12-03 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for personal care products and method for making
US6506371B1 (en) 2000-07-14 2003-01-14 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for personal care products and method for making
US6619294B1 (en) 2000-07-14 2003-09-16 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for personal care products and method for making
US6733840B2 (en) * 2002-06-05 2004-05-11 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for textile applications
US6989149B2 (en) 2001-01-17 2006-01-24 Glenn Jr Robert Wayne Delivery of reactive agents via self emulsification for use in shelf-stable products
US7118733B2 (en) 2000-07-14 2006-10-10 General Electric Company Topical silicone compositions and method for making
WO2013004982A2 (en) 2011-07-07 2013-01-10 L'oreal Cosmetic treatment processes and kit

Families Citing this family (34)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6991781B2 (en) * 2001-01-17 2006-01-31 The Procter & Gamble Company Delivery of reactive agents via bi-layer structures for use in shelf-stable products
US20020192173A1 (en) * 2001-01-22 2002-12-19 The Procter & Gamble Company Anhydrous treatment compositions for the delivery of reactive agents to amino-acid based substrates
US20040142084A1 (en) * 2003-01-21 2004-07-22 Knueven Carl J. Alkali metal bisulfates to mask aftertaste of artificial sweeteners
US7632531B2 (en) * 2003-04-11 2009-12-15 International Flavors & Fragnances Inc. Alkyldienamides exhibiting taste and sensory effect in flavor compositions
US7361376B2 (en) * 2003-04-11 2008-04-22 International Flavors & Fragrances Inc. Alkyldienamides exhibiting taste and sensory effect in flavor compositions
US7141686B2 (en) 2003-07-10 2006-11-28 International Flavors & Fragrances Inc. E2, E4, Z8-undecatrienoic acid and ester and carboxamide derivatives thereof, organoleptic uses thereof and processes for preparing same
US8007839B2 (en) * 2003-10-03 2011-08-30 International Flavors & Fragrances Conjugated dienamides, methods of production thereof, compositions containing same and uses thereof
DE602005027463D1 (en) * 2004-02-13 2011-05-26 Cognis France Sas USE OF A COSMETIC COMPOSITION CONTAINING EXTRACT OF CASTANEA SATIVA LEAVES
US7687145B2 (en) * 2004-10-04 2010-03-30 The Regents Of The University Of California Compounds containing a thiol protected group bonded to a protecting group via a polarized bond, and structure comprising the compounds on its surface
US7192795B2 (en) * 2004-11-18 2007-03-20 3M Innovative Properties Company Method of making light emitting device with silicon-containing encapsulant
US7820147B2 (en) * 2005-11-18 2010-10-26 Mata Michael T Hair restorative compositions and methods for treating damaged hair and safely chemically treating hair
PL2101878T3 (en) * 2007-01-16 2010-09-30 Unilever Nv Hair straightening composition
WO2008115337A1 (en) * 2007-03-19 2008-09-25 Mallinckrodt Inc. Sulfur-protected mercaptoacetylglycylglycylglycine
FR2921258A1 (en) * 2007-09-24 2009-03-27 Oreal TINCTORIAL COMPOSITION COMPRISING AT LEAST ONE COLOR DISULFIDE / THIOL PRECURSOR, COLORING PROCESS FROM THE COMPOSITION
WO2009067404A2 (en) * 2007-11-19 2009-05-28 New Biology, Inc. Methods for improving flowering characteristics using methyl dihydrojasmonate
FR2928087B1 (en) * 2008-02-29 2010-02-26 Oreal COMPOSITION FOR COLORING KERATIN FIBERS COMPRISING AT LEAST ONE DIRECT DYE WITH PROTECTED DISULFIDE / THIOL FUNCTION AND AT LEAST ONE THIOL FUNCTIONED SILICY COMPOUND AND PROCESS USING THE COMPOSITION.
US8563839B2 (en) 2008-05-06 2013-10-22 New Biology, Inc. Methods of reducing leaf senescence using methyl dihydrojasmonate
WO2009137258A2 (en) * 2008-05-06 2009-11-12 New Biology, Inc Methods for reducing leaf senescence using methyl dihydrojasmonate
FR2968954B1 (en) * 2010-12-15 2012-12-21 Oreal PROCESS FOR COLORING KERATIN FIBERS USING A DIRECT DYE WITH PROTECTED DISULFIDE / THIOL / THIOL FUNCTION AND WATER VAPOR
EP2704683B1 (en) * 2011-05-06 2017-10-18 Basf Se Chromophores with perfluoroalkyl substituents
WO2013165424A1 (en) * 2012-05-03 2013-11-07 Avon Products, Inc. Sol-gel compositions and cosmetic methods of use thereof
AU2012397212B2 (en) * 2012-12-20 2015-11-12 Colgate-Palmolive Company Oral care composition containing ionic liquids
JP2014125447A (en) * 2012-12-26 2014-07-07 Eiweiss Kk Compound and photodetachment protective agent comprising the same
KR101453220B1 (en) 2013-12-09 2014-10-22 주식회사 엘지생활건강 Compositions for conditioning
CN107001637B (en) 2014-09-23 2021-06-15 迈图高新材料股份有限公司 Siloxane compounds and compositions thereof for treating amino acid-based substrates
JP6421131B2 (en) * 2016-01-12 2018-11-07 大日精化工業株式会社 Pigment dispersant, pigment composition, and pigment colorant
US20180311134A1 (en) * 2017-04-27 2018-11-01 The Procter & Gamble Company Odorless thiols for permanent waving, straightening and depilatory applications
US11179312B2 (en) 2017-06-05 2021-11-23 Momentive Performance Materials Inc. Aqueous compositions for the treatment of hair
US10982051B2 (en) 2017-06-05 2021-04-20 Momentive Performance Materials Inc. Aqueous compositions for hair treatment comprising polyorganosiloxanes with polyhydroxyaromatic moieties
US20200163850A1 (en) 2018-11-24 2020-05-28 Momentive Performance Materials Gmbh Use of polyhydroxyaromatic compounds for the treatment of fibrous amino acid based substrates
US10617617B1 (en) 2018-12-04 2020-04-14 Momentive Performance Materials Inc. Polycarboxylic acid compounds for the treatment of fibrious amino acid based substrates, especially hair
US11090255B2 (en) 2018-12-04 2021-08-17 Momentive Performance Materials Inc. Use of polycarboxylic acid compounds for the treatment of fibrious amino acid based substrates, especially hair
CN109942465A (en) * 2019-03-26 2019-06-28 广东工业大学 A kind of cycloheptatriene -1- thio-ether type compounds and its synthetic method and application
CN116235916A (en) * 2023-03-23 2023-06-09 南通大学 Sports beverage and preparation method thereof

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2039218A (en) * 1978-11-30 1980-08-06 Wyeth John & Brother Ltd Pharmaceutical Compositions
US4895917A (en) * 1987-10-16 1990-01-23 Th. Goldschmidt Ag Organopolysiloxanes with Bunte salt groups
EP0556110A1 (en) * 1992-02-10 1993-08-18 Exsymol S.A.M. Vector for therapeutic or cosmetic drugs for external use and therapeutic or cosmetic composition containing such a vector
US5523080A (en) * 1993-05-18 1996-06-04 Chesebrough-Pond's Usa Co., Division Of Conopco, Inc. Cosmetic treatment of substrates

Family Cites Families (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR2549051B1 (en) 1983-06-22 1986-05-16 Centre Nat Rech Scient NOVEL RADIOPROTECTIVE AGENTS HAVING AN AMINO-THIOALKYL STRUCTURE AND PROCESS FOR THEIR PREPARATION
JPS63107989A (en) * 1986-06-04 1988-05-12 Tanabe Seiyaku Co Ltd Cephalosporin compound
FR2607002B1 (en) 1986-11-21 1989-04-07 Oreal NEW PROCESS FOR THE REINFORCEMENT AND / OR PERMANENT DEFORMATION OF HAIR, AND COMPOSITION FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION OF THIS PROCESS
US4973475A (en) 1988-10-07 1990-11-27 Revlon, Inc. Hair treatment and conditioning agents
US5211942A (en) 1990-08-03 1993-05-18 Clairol Incorporated Halide containing quaternary ammonium salts as hair conditioning agents
US5206013A (en) 1990-08-03 1993-04-27 Clairol, Inc. Sulfur containing quaternary ammonium salts as hair conditioning agents
US5087733A (en) 1990-08-03 1992-02-11 Clairol, Inc. Sulfur containing quaternary ammonium salts as hair conditioning agents
US5030756A (en) 1990-08-03 1991-07-09 Clairol Incorporated Halide containing quaternary ammonium salts as hair conditioning agents
US5254335A (en) 1990-10-10 1993-10-19 Clairol Incorporated Hair conditioning compounds containing reactive nonionic surfactants and isothiuronium compounds and method of use
FR2675378B1 (en) 1991-04-19 1993-08-27 Oreal COMPOSITION AND METHOD USING THIOL SILICONES FOR PROTECTING THE COLOR OF DYED KERATINIC FIBERS.
US5350572A (en) 1993-02-18 1994-09-27 Shiseido Co., Ltd. Permanent waving composition
GB9415911D0 (en) 1994-08-05 1994-09-28 Unilever Plc Hair styling composition and method
GB9423356D0 (en) 1994-11-17 1995-01-11 Unilever Plc Oral treatment
US5736624A (en) 1994-12-02 1998-04-07 Abbott Laboratories Phosphatase activated crosslinking, conjugating and reducing agents; methods of using such agents; and reagents comprising phosphatase activated crosslinking and conjugating agents
US5609861A (en) 1994-12-02 1997-03-11 L'oreal Composition and process using silicone thiols for the protection of the color of dyed keratinous fibres
FR2760359B1 (en) 1997-03-04 2000-01-07 Oreal PROCESS FOR TREATING A KERATINIC SUBSTRATE

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2039218A (en) * 1978-11-30 1980-08-06 Wyeth John & Brother Ltd Pharmaceutical Compositions
US4895917A (en) * 1987-10-16 1990-01-23 Th. Goldschmidt Ag Organopolysiloxanes with Bunte salt groups
EP0556110A1 (en) * 1992-02-10 1993-08-18 Exsymol S.A.M. Vector for therapeutic or cosmetic drugs for external use and therapeutic or cosmetic composition containing such a vector
US5523080A (en) * 1993-05-18 1996-06-04 Chesebrough-Pond's Usa Co., Division Of Conopco, Inc. Cosmetic treatment of substrates

Cited By (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6752984B2 (en) 2000-07-14 2004-06-22 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for personal care products and method for making
US6390102B1 (en) 2000-07-14 2002-05-21 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for personal care products and method for making
US6488921B1 (en) 2000-07-14 2002-12-03 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for personal care products and method for making
US6506371B1 (en) 2000-07-14 2003-01-14 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for personal care products and method for making
US6619294B1 (en) 2000-07-14 2003-09-16 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for personal care products and method for making
US7118733B2 (en) 2000-07-14 2006-10-10 General Electric Company Topical silicone compositions and method for making
US6844002B2 (en) 2000-07-14 2005-01-18 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for personal care products and method for making
US6841164B2 (en) 2000-07-14 2005-01-11 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for personal care products and method for making
US6849264B2 (en) 2000-07-14 2005-02-01 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for personal care products and method for making
US6849265B2 (en) 2000-07-14 2005-02-01 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for personal care products and method for making
WO2002048304A1 (en) * 2000-12-11 2002-06-20 Unilever Plc Textile care composition
US6989149B2 (en) 2001-01-17 2006-01-24 Glenn Jr Robert Wayne Delivery of reactive agents via self emulsification for use in shelf-stable products
US6733840B2 (en) * 2002-06-05 2004-05-11 General Electric Company Silicone compositions for textile applications
WO2013004982A2 (en) 2011-07-07 2013-01-10 L'oreal Cosmetic treatment processes and kit

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU2603700A (en) 2000-07-24
CA2356325A1 (en) 2000-07-13
WO2000040210A3 (en) 2001-11-29
CN1433297A (en) 2003-07-30
BR0007437A (en) 2001-11-20
US6544499B1 (en) 2003-04-08
JP2002541058A (en) 2002-12-03
EP1143916A2 (en) 2001-10-17
CA2356325C (en) 2005-12-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP1143916A2 (en) Topical compositions comprising protected functional thiols
JP2872392B2 (en) Reduction composition for permanent deformation of hair using aminomercaptoalkylamide or a salt thereof as reducing agent
CA1217296A (en) Polyquaternary polysiloxane polymers
JP6764792B2 (en) Keratin-treated formulations and methods
US6495125B2 (en) Topical compositions comprising protected functional thiols
US6703007B2 (en) Topical compositions comprising functional nucleophiles protected by phosphorus-containing moieties
CA2717914C (en) Hair treatment composition and methods
WO1993001791A1 (en) Azeotropic blend of propyl 2-hydroxy thioglycolate and ethyl 1-methyl 2-hydroxy thioglycolate, process for its preparation and use thereof in a process for achieving a permanent change in hair waviness
TWI808942B (en) Methods and formulations for curling hair
FR2692481A1 (en) Reductive cosmetic composition for the permanent deformation of hair based on a mercaptoalkylamino amide and permanent hair deformation process.
JPH06247835A (en) Basic cosmetic
WO2009101322A2 (en) Cosmetic composition comprising a cationic surfactant compound, novel compounds, use as conditioner and cosmetic treatment method
JPH06247827A (en) Make-up cosmetic
WO2017025244A1 (en) Cosmetic process for treating keratin materials
JP2000507272A (en) Permanent hair treatment and processing method based on N-branched alkyl-substituted mercaptoacetamide, and method for producing the same
NL8803128A (en) SULPHONAMIDES, DERIVED FROM 3-BENZYLIDES CAMPHONE, AND THEIR USE IN COSMETIC PREPARATIONS.
CA2519205A1 (en) Topical compositions comprising protected functional thiols
KR101701881B1 (en) Functional composition for surface modification
EP0568695A1 (en) Cosmetic composition for hair perming containing cystein bromhydrate and/or 2-mercapto ethylamine bromhydrate as the reducing agent.
JP3851322B2 (en) Dithiols containing amide functional groups and their use in changing hairstyles
WO2019086505A2 (en) Composition comprising thiolactones comprising a carbonate function and process for treating keratin materials using same
CN104053428A (en) Process For Treating Keratin Fibers
KR102364647B1 (en) Functional composition for surface modification
JPH06192040A (en) Hair cosmetic
KR102349949B1 (en) Composition for improving of shining effect

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 00804639.5

Country of ref document: CN

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AL AM AT AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CR CU CZ CZ DE DE DK DK DM EE EE ES FI FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2356325

Country of ref document: CA

Ref document number: 2356325

Country of ref document: CA

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2000 591967

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PA/A/2001/006912

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2000904252

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2000904252

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): AE AL AM AT AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CR CU CZ CZ DE DE DK DK DM EE EE ES FI FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG